Manual de Mantenimiento VJ1304

Service
Manual
ValueJet 1304
AP-74109
Rev. 1.0
Important Notice
VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual
Important Notice
1. For Users in Europe
Important:
This is a Class A product approved for industrial environments. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case you may be required to take
adequate measures.
2. For Users in the United States
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual
MUTOH, ValueJet, VJ-1304 are registered trademarks or product names of MUTOH INDUSTRIES
LTD.
Centronics and BiCentronics are registered trademarks or product names of Centronics Data Computer
Corporation.
Windows95, Windows98, Windows98SE, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, Windows XP, and MSDOS are registered trademarks or product names of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.
No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

transmitted in any form or by any means, except for personal use,
without the permission of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
The product and the contents of this publication may be changed

without prior notification.
MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. has made the best efforts to keep this
publication free from error, but if you find any uncertainties or
misprints, please call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.
MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or

troubles resulting from the use of this equipment or this manual.
(1)
Rev.-01
Warranty Limitations
Warranty Limitations
1. MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. warrants part repair or replacement as a sole measure only if a failure is
found in the system or in the materials and workmanship of the product the seller produced.
However, if the cause of failure is uncertain, decide the action after due mutual consultation.
2. The warranty shall not apply to any direct or indirect loss, or compensation for the loss due to the product
that has been subject to misuse, neglect, or improper alternation.
3. The warranty period is described in the warranty certificate.
Rev.-01
(2)
About this Manual
About this Manual

1. Purpose and Target Readers
This manual explains preparations needed before maintaining and checking operations for MUTOH Full
Color Ink Jet Printer (VJ-1304).
This manual is prepared for the maintenance personnel of this printer.
Before using this printer, fully understand the contents and directions in this manual.
2. Manual Configuration
Section
Contents
1 Safety Instructions
Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the printer

for the both operators of the printer and maintenance personnel.
2 Product Overview
Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
3 Specifications
Explains the specifications of the printer.
4 Parts Replacement
Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the service parts

of the printer.
5 Self-Diagnostic Mode
Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.
6 Maintenance Mode
Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.
7 Adjustment
Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.
8 Maintenance
Explains daily maintenance of the printer.
9 Troubleshooting
Explains troubles that may occur when using the printer and how to
solve them.
10 Appendix
Explains the maintenance information and the exploded views for this
printer.
Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and adjust/
check during maintenance.
(3)
Rev.-01
About this Manual
3. Manual Notation
The following symbols are used in this manual for easier understanding of the information.
Symbol
Meaning
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
CAUTION
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

your equipment
NOTE
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

product
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the equipment
TIP
Indicates reference pages in this manual
4. Establishment Date of This Document
This document was established on September 18, 2007.
5. Firmware version covered by this document
Firmware version: Ver.1.00
Rev.-01
(4)
General Table of Contents

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.3 Winding unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.4 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.1 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 Network Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rev.-01
3.4 Options/Supplies List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.4.1 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4.2 Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.5
Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 Removal of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.2.10 Assembling of Scroller Receiver L and R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.7 Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-26
4-27
4-29
4-31
4-34
4-37
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
4-40
4-42
4-43
4-44
4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin Point Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley and CR belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-49
4-50
4-53
4-54
Rev.-01
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

4.6.1 Replacing Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.7.2 Replacing Maintenance Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.11 Replacing Accessory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.11.1 Replacing Level Switch (Waste Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.12 Replacing Take Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.12.1 Removing Tension Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.12.2 Removing Take Up Unit Fixing Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.12.4 Replacing Scroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.12.5 Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4.12.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.12.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take Up Unit Motor Assembly . 4-110
5 Self-Diagnosis Mode
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rev.-01
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5 Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Version Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4 Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5 Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.6 Fan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.7 History Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-21
5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.7 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 CR Return Position Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 Skew Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.5 Voltage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5-25
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-33
5-36
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5.8 Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.9 Sample Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.1 Adjustment pattern ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.2 Parameter ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.3 Error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.4 Dot pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-50
5-51
5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

5.11 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Rev.-01
5.12 Servo Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

5.13 Endurance Running Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.14 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.15 ExControl Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.15.1 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.15.2 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.15.3 Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.15.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.16 PaperInitial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
6 Maintenance Mode 2
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Adjustment
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Working with MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.1 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.3 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.3.5 Firmware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.3.6 Sending Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
9
Rev.-01
7.3.7
7.3.8
Sub Controller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Date & Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4.1 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 Date & Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5 Editing Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.6 Downloading and Saving Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.7 Updating Main Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.8 Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.9 Receiving Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.10 Sending Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.11 Using Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.12 Downloading Individual Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.13 Uploading Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.14 Referring Setup List Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.15 Referring Adjust Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.16 Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.17 Quitting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-31
7-40
7-41
7-43
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-51
7-54
7-58
7-59
7-61
7-63
7-65
7-66
7.5 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

7.5.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.5.2 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.6 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.7 CR Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.8 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7.9 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7.10 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7.10.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7.11 PG Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.11.1 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.12 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7.12.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
7.12.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Rev.-01
10
8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Periodical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.1 Periodical Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.2 Parts need to be checked or replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3 Part Life Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.5 Transportation of Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2.1 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.3.3 Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9.3.4 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
9.3.5 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
9.3.6 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.3.7 Troubleshooting For A Dedicated Network Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Maintenance Part List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4 Jigs and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.4.1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.5 Operation Panel Messages (Bilingual List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.6 Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
11
Rev.-01
Rev.-01
12
1.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2
Warnings, Cautions and Notes.............................................................. 1- 2
1.3
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................ 1- 3
1.4
Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 1- 9

1.4.1 Handling the Warning Labels......................................................... 1-9
1.4.2 Locations and Types of Warning Labels........................................ 1-9
1.5
Operation Labels................................................................................... 1- 13
1.5.1 Handling the Operation Labels .................................................... 1-13
1.5.2 Locations and Types of Operation Labels ................................... 1-14
1-1
Rev.-01
1.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the meaning of safety terms for personnel who installs, operates, or maintains this
equipment, important safety instructions, and the warning labels attached to the equipment.
WARNING
Make sure to follow all instructions and warnings on this manual when installing, operating,
or maintaining the equipment.
1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the printer are categorized into the
following three types depending on the degree of risk (or the scale of accident).
Read the following explanations carefully, and follow the instructions in this manual.
Table 1-1 Safety Terms Descriptions
Safety terms
Details
Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
WARNING
DANGER
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

whole or part of the product
NOTE
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

product
TIP
Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the printer

Indicates "prohibited" operations
Indicates required operations
Indicates reference page in this manual
Rev.-01
1-2
1.3 Important Safety Instructions

General safety instructions that must be observed to use the equipment safely are explained below.
WARNING
Do not place the printer in the following areas. Doing so may result in the printer
tipping or falling over and causing injury.
Unstable surfaces
Angled place
Areas subject to vibration by other equipment
Do not stand on or place heavy objects on your printer. Doing so may result in the
printer tipping or falling over and causing injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of your printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table
cloth. Doing so could obstruct ventilation and cause fire.
Do not place the printer in humid and dusty areas. Doing so may result in electrical
shock or fire.
Do not use damaged power cable. It could lead to an electric shock and fire.
Do not take out or insert power plug with a wet hand. This could lead to an electric
shock.
Make sure that the following is performed before parts replacement.
Turn off the power of the printer.
Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
Do not connect an earth wire to the following places.
Gas pipe
There is a possibility of ignition and explosion.
Earth wire of telephone cables and lightning rods
Heavy current might flow whenever a lightning strikes.
Water pipe and faucet

The earth might not work if a plastic pipe is connected in the middle of the metal
pipe.
Do not store combustible materials on Platen while performing the heater operation.
It could lead to fire.
Do not spill flammable liquid over platen. This could lead to fire.
1-3
Rev.-01
Do not insert or drop metal or flammable objects into the printer through openings
such as a fresh air inlet. It could lead to an electric shock and fire.
When foreign substances or liquids such as water entered the printer, do not use
the printer as it is. It could lead to an electric shock and fire. Immediately turn OFF
the power switch, disconnect the power plug from the electric socket.
Be sure to use the power cable supplied with the printer. If other power cables are
used, it would cause an electric shock or fire.
Make sure to use only the specified power supply (AC 100 V - 120 V or AC 220 V 240 V). If the power supply other than the specified voltage is used, it could cause
an electric shock and fire.
Take power for the printer directly from the power socket (AC 100 V - 120 V or AC
220 V - 240 V). Do not use complex multiple plugs on the same socket. This could
generate heat and might cause fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power socket with earth wire for the power supply, and
connect it to the earth wire. If the earth wire is not connected, an electric shock or
fire may occur.
The waste fluid from the printer is a waste oil (waste ink) of industrial waste. Proper
waste fluid disposal according to industrial waste disposal laws and ordinances of
your local governments are required. Consign disposal of waste fluids to specialized
processor.
Rev.-01
1-4
CAUTION
Assembling and disassembling of the printer are possible only for the parts that
disassembling procedures are shown in this manual. Do not disassemble any frame
parts or parts that disassembling procedures are not shown in this manual.
Doing so may cause trouble that cannot be restored, as the printer is originally
assembled in the factory with a high accuracy of 1/100 mm.
Do not touch the elements on the circuit board with bare hands.
Doing so may cause static electricity and break the elements.
Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hands. Doing
so may discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get
any dust.
There are some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from
the tube outlet onto the printer or items close to the printer.
If you need to operate the printer with the cover removed for maintenance, be
careful not to get hurt by the driving parts.
Never lube the printer mechanism with lube other than that designated by MUTOH.
Doing so may damage the parts or shorten the lifetime.
If the power board assembly needs to be removed, remove the power cable and
wait for 5 minutes or more before taking it out; this will discharge the residual
electrical charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
Touching the board before the capacitor discharges may cause electric shock.
When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on a main board assembly
connector, make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the
connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or shortcircuit the inner
terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
When connecting or removing an FFC type cable on the CR board assembly
connector, make sure to connect or remove the cable perpendicular to the
connector.
Connecting or removing at a slant angle may damage, break or shortcircuit the inner
terminal of the connector. That may damage the elements on the board.
Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing
maintenance work.
Maintenance must be done by more than two persons for the following work.
When disassembling or reassembling the product and the optional stand
When packing the printer for transportation
1-5
Rev.-01
Pay attention to the following points, while handling power cable.

Do not do anything forcefully on the power cable.
Do not keep heavy objects on the power cable.
Do not bend, twist or pull the power cable by force.
Do not route the power cable near heating appliances.
Pay attention to the following points while handling power supply plug. Any
mishandling of the power cable could cause a fire.
Make sure that no foreign substances such as dust etc. are stuck to the power
plug.
The power plug is firmly inserted to the edge of the power socket.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers when opening/closing the front cover or
maintenance cover.
While handling ink cartridge, pay attention so that the ink does not get into eyes or
stick to the skin. If the ink gets into the eyes or sticks to the skin, immediately wash
it off with water. It might possibly cause irritation and light inflammation of eyes. In
case of any abnormality, consult a physician immediately.
Do not disassemble ink cartridges. If disassembled, there is a possibility that the ink
might come into contact with eyes or skin.
Do not operate the media loading lever during initial operation. The carriage portion
may touch the pressurizing roller portion causing a malfunction.
Do not touch the media guide during printing. It is hot and may cause a burn.
Be careful that your fingers are not caught in the driven section of the winding unit.
Pay attention to the following points when you cut roll media. Mishandling the razor
blade may cause a cut on your finger or hand.
When you hold media, do not place your finger on the media cut groove.
Move the razor blade along the media cut groove.
Do not apply Jetwash, thinner, benzine, or alcohol to the printer parts, excluding
listed below. Such use may result in printer malfunction
Inside the maintenance cover
Surface of the print head
Be careful that moisture does not enter the printer. There is a possibility that electric
circuit inside the printer is short circuited.
Rev.-01
1-6
While cleaning with the cleaning wiper

Do not touch the cleaning wiper and head cap unit.
Head cleaning may not be operated correctly because of the grease attached.
Make sure to wipe the print head with a dry poly-knit wiper.
A wet poly-knit wiper may cause the print head to clog.
Do not use clean sticks.
Attached dust may damage the print head.
Be careful the followings when cleaning the outer of the print head:
Do not touch the print head nozzle part.
Such operation may damage the print head.
Do not touch the tip of the clean stick.
Fat sticks to the clean stick may damage the print head.
Do not sink the clean stick into water.
Such operation may damage the print head.
Do not re-use any used clean stick.
Attached dust may damage the print head.
Do not slant the printer body, prop it against a wall or turn it upside down. There is
a possibility that ink inside the printer may leak. Moreover, normal operation after
shifting (to these positions) cannot be guaranteed.
Unpack or move the printer by more than two person.
When taking this printer out of the package box, make sure to remove the vinyl
sheet and hold the handles on the side of the printer. If the printer is lifted with the
vinyl sheet attached, there is a possibility that the printer falls slipping from hands
and gets damaged.
When you do not use the printer for a long period, make sure to pull out the power
plug from the power socket for safety.
Make sure to connect an earth wire to the earth connection which meets the following
standards.
Earth terminal of power socket
Earth wire with copper plate which is buried at 650 mm or more, deep in the ground.
Earth terminal which grounded properly (earth resistance: 100 or less).
Keep the work area well-ventilated. This prevents fire and operators from feeling
sick from bad air.
Execute the following operation by more than two persons:
Setting the winding unit.
When printing is finished, the media guide and the platen are at high temperature. Wait
until the media guide and the platen cool off.
1-7
Rev.-01
When cleaning the printer, be sure to turn OFF the power and disconnect the power
plug.
Move the printer maintaining a horizontal position.
Be sure to operate the following before attaching option units.

Turn the printer power off.
Unplug the power cable.
Otherwise, the printer or computer may be damaged.
Remove the static electricity by touching the metal part of the printer from your
cloth or body.
Electric part such as RAM may be damaged.
Do not touch the board elements when attaching option units. The elements become
high temperature and may cause the burn.
Rev.-01
1-8
1.4 Warning Labels

The handling, attachment locations, and types of warning labels are explained below.
Warning labels are attached to areas where care should be taken. Read and understand the positions and
contents thoroughly before maintenance operation.
1.4.1
Handling the Warning Labels
Make sure to note the following when handling the warning labels.
NOTE
Make sure that all warning labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
When cleaning warning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent or
gasoline.
If a warning label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1.4.2
Locations and Types of Warning Labels
The locations of warning labels are shown below.
(1) Main Body

2
1-9
Rev.-01
Table 1-2 List of Warning Labels

No.
Warning label type
(T fence handling caution)
(Front cover open/close caution)
(High temperature caution)
(2) Winding unit

The locations of warning labels on the winding unit are shown below.
Rev.-01
1-10
No.
Warning label type
(Catching caution)
1.5 Operation Labels

This chapter describes the operation labels including their types and attaching positions.
The operation labels are attached on the product to provide the brief instructions for the particularly important
operations. Learn the instructions and the attaching positions before operation.
1.5.1
Handling the Operation Labels
Make sure to note the following when handling the operation labels.
NOTE
Make sure that all operation labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen clearly,
clean or replace the label.
When cleaning operation labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a solvent
or gasoline.
If an operation label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
1-11
Rev.-01
1.5.2
Locations and Types of Operation Labels
The locations of operation labels are shown below.

1
Table 1-3 List of Operation Labels

No.
Operation label type
(Roll media setting)
"Operation manual" Setting Roll Media
Rev.-01
1-12
Table 1-3 List of Operation Labels (Continued)

No.
Operation label type
(Ink arrangement)
"Operation manual" Replacing Ink Cartridges
1-13
Rev.-01
Rev.-01
1-14
2 Product Overview
2 Product Overview
2.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 2- 2
2.2
Features ................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.3
Part Names and Functions..................................................................... 2- 3

2.3.1 Front Section ................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.2 Rear Section .................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Winding unit (Optional) .................................................................. 2-6
2.3.4 Operation Panel ............................................................................. 2-7
2.4
Printer Status ........................................................................................ 2- 10

2.4.1 Normal ......................................................................................... 2-10
2.4.2 Setup Menu ................................................................................. 2-10
2.4.3 Self-Diagnosis Function ............................................................... 2-10
2.4.4 Maintenance Mode ...................................................................... 2-10
2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature .................... 2-11
2-1
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
2.2 Features
The features of the printer are explained below.
(1) Fast Print

The new print head adopted on this printer performs fast to print images.
Also, this printer prints up to 1355.5mm (when uni-directional print mode) or 1336.5mm (when bi-directional
print mode) in width.
(2) Variety of Print Media

The height of the print head position can be set high/low, so that this model can print on the media of which
thickness is between 0.08 and 1.00 mm.
(3) Vivid Color Reproduction

For vivid color reproduction, this model has high-capacity (220 ml) 4 color ink cartridges with exclusive
smart IC chip on it. With the IC chip, you can manage the ink level of the cartridges and can get better
productivity.
Also, with the variable dot method, richer color expression can be enhanced.
(4) Multi-Heater System

The media-heating system which have been equipped to PJ series is changed to match the solvent ink. There
are 3 heaters on Pre / Platen / After positions and improved the ink flexibility and drying property.
(5) Effective Utilization of Media

The JOG function is featured, which allows to set random print start positions. Printed media can be reprinted
and blank areas on the media can be put to effective use.
Rev.-01
2-2
2 Product Overview
2.3 Part Names and Functions

Part names and functions are explained below.
NOTE
For the directions described in this document, refer to the following figure.
Upper
Rear
Left
Right
Front
Lower
2-3
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.3.1
Front Section

Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section

No.
Name
Function
Media set lever
This lever is used to fix or release the media.
Operation panel
This panel is used to set operational conditions, the status of the printer,
and other functions.
Front cover
This cover keeps the operator safe from the drive parts of the printer while
it is operating.This is opened/closed when replacing the cutter or paper is
jammed.This should be closed during normal use.
Stand
This stand is used to set the printer on the level surface of the floor.
Book holder
This holder is used to store printed guide such as Quick Reference Guide.
Media Guide
This guide is used to feed media smoothly when setting media and
printing.
Media cut guide
This guide groove is used to cut printed media straight.
Pressure roller
This is inside the front cover.

Presses and supports the media in the witdth when printing.
Rev.-01
2-4
2 Product Overview
Table 2-1 Part Names and Functions of Front Section(Continued)

No.
9
2.3.2
Name
Function
Platen
This is inside the front cover.

There are heaters (platen hearter) inside to dry ink.
Rear Section
5
C M
Y
4
Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section

No.
Name
Function
AC inlet
For inserting the power cable plug.
Network interface
connector
Connector to connect a network interface cable.
USB connector
This printer does not support the connector.
Scroller receiver
The scroller is set here when using roll media.
Media feed slot
Insert media from here when feeding media.
Ink cartridge slot
This holds the ink cartridge.
Media guide
Supports the media to be feed smoothly when media setting and printing.
There are pre heaters inside to warm the media.
Waste fluid tank
This is a tank that contains the waste ink.
2-5
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
Table 2-2 Part Names and Functions of Rear Section(Continued)

No.
Name
Function
Waste fluid valve
2.3.3
Open this valve to discharge the waste fluid from the waste fluid tank.
In other case, close the valve.
Winding unit
6
7
2
9
10
Table 2-3 Part Names and Functions of Winding Unit

No.
Name
Function
Winding unit
Winds the printed media.
Cushioning roller
Loads the printed media to the winding unit.
Scroller receiver
Used when setting the scroller of the winding unit.
Scroller release lever
Releases the scroller from the winding unit, allowing you to turn the
scroller with your hand.
Scroller
Used when winding the printed media.
Scroller height fixing

screw
Fix the height of the scroller receiver.
Scroller height
adjustment screw
Adjust the height of the scroller receiver.
Horizontal adjustment
screw
Adjust the side position of the scroller.
Power switch
Used when turning the power ON and OFF.
Rev.-01
2-6
2 Product Overview
Table 2-3 Part Names and Functions of Winding Unit

No.
Name
10
Operation panel
Function
Used for setting operation conditions, display of unit status.
"Winding unit for VJ-1304"
2-7
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.3.4
Operation Panel
The operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the printer, and set other
functions.
The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below.
TIP
Operation manual
8, 9
10
17
13
14
15
16
6
11
12
1
Rev.-01
2-8
2 Product Overview
(1) Operation Keys

NOTE
Some keys have multiple functions and names depending on the printer status (normal or setup menu
display). See "2.4 Printer Status" p.2-11 for more details.
No.
Name
Normal
Setup menu display
[Menu] key
Changes the LCD monitor display to Changes the setup menu display
setup menu status.
status to normal status.
[Enter] key
- Selects the menu to be set and shifts

to the next hierarchy.
- Determines and saves the parameter
value.
[Cleaning] key
If held down for 2 seconds or more,

starts cleaning the printer head.
[Cancel] key
- During plotting: Terminates printing

forcibly and deletes 1 file of
remaining data.
- During reception/analysis: Deletes
the data that has been already
received/analyzed and ignores 1 file
of data received after that.
-
- Returns to the previous menu

hierarchy. Changed parameter values
are disabled.
- Changes the setup menu display
status to normal status.
[<] key
Sets the media type.

- The lamp for the cleaning mode
lights on (green).
-Changes the setting value in the

following menu:
Origin setting menu
[Nozzle Check] key
If held down for 2 seconds or more,

starts checking the printer nozzle.
[>] key
Sets the cleaning mode.

- The lamp for the media type lights
on (green).
Displays lower rank menu items.
[Backward ] key
Feeds the media in the reverse

direction.
[ + ] key
-Changes the menu in forward order.

-Changes the setting value in forward
order.
-Increases the value when inputting
setting value.
[Forward ] key
Feeds the media in the forward

direction.
[ - ] key
- Changes the menu in the reverse

direction.
- Decreases the value when inputting
values.
2-9
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
No.
8
Name
Normal
[Power] key
Turns the printer on and off.
Setup menu display

Turns the printer on and off.
(2) LCD Monitor and Status Lamps

No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Name
Color
Power lamp
Green
Data lamp
High lamp
Low lamp
Wave lamp
Red
Green
Green
Red
Fine & S.Fine

lamp
Red
Strong lamp
Green
Normal lamp
LCD monitor
Rev.-01
Green
Status
Function
On
The printer is switched on.
Blinking
An error has occurred. The contents will be displayed on the

LCD monitor.
Off
The printer is switched off.
On
- The printer is analyzing received data.

- The printer is printing data.
Blinking
The printer is receiving data.
Off
The printer is not receiving, analyzing or printing data.
On
The print head height is set to High position.
Off
The print head height is set to Low position.
On
The print head height is set to Low position.
Off
The print head height is set to High position.
On
The effect menu is set to Wave.
Off
The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
On
The effect menu is set to either Fine or SuperFine.
Off
The effect menu is set to Wave.
On
- The cleaning mode is set to Strong.

- When the Normal lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy.
Off
- The effect menu is set to Wave.

- When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy quality.
On
- The cleaning mode is set to Normal.

- When the Strong lamp is also on, the cleaning mode is set
to Economy quality.
Off
The cleaning mode is set to Strong.
This monitor displays the operation status and error

messages of the printer.
2-10
2 Product Overview
2.4 Printer Status

The status of the printer is explained below.
2.4.1
Normal
Indicates that the printer can print when media is loaded.

Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.2
Setup Menu
Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using operation panel.

The settings required for normal printing are usually made on the printer driver or application, but can also
be made using the operation panel.
TIP
Operation manual
2.4.3
Self-Diagnosis Function
Indicates that each settings concerning printing using the operation panel. Names and functions of the
operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"5 Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-1
2.4.4
Maintenance Mode
Indicates that each setup concerning to the life counter on this printer can be operated by using the operation
panel. Names and functions of the operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
TIP
"6 Maintenance Mode 2" p.6-1
2-11
Rev.-01
2 Product Overview
2.4.5
Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature
This section describes how to select the language displayed in the operation panel.
Follow the steps below to select the language.
NOTE
You can choose panel language and panel temperature as follows.
Language:Japanese or English
Temperature:Celsius or Fahrenheit
1. Press [Power] key in the operation panel while

pressing [Cancel] key.
2. Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]

key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
* panel temperature appears after panel
language. Operation is same as before.
Rev.-01
2-12
3 Specifications
3 Specifications
3.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 3- 2
3.2
Product Specifications ........................................................................... 3- 2
3.3
Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 3- 4
3.3.1
USB Interface Specifications ........................................................ 3-4
3.3.2 Network Interface Specifications.................................................... 3-5

3.4
Options/Supplies List ............................................................................. 3- 5

3.4.1 Options .......................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 Supplies ......................................................................................... 3-5
3.5
Choosing a Place for the Printer .......................................................... 3- 6
3-1
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
3.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the specifications of the product, optional parts, and supplies. Installation environment
requirements are also explained.
3.2 Product Specifications

(1) Main Unit Specifications
Item
Specifications
Model name
VJ-1304
Plotting method
On-demand piezo drive
Motor driving method
Firmware servo/DC motor drive
Media feeding method
Multi-point pressure grid roller method
Media fixing method
Pressurizing roller manual-down method
Media supply and Roll media

ejection
Front feeding/front paper ejection
Media type
Tracing Paper
Roll media outer

diameter
2-inch
Maximum
loadable media
weight
Roll media
150 mm or less
19 kg (41.9 lb) or less
Maximum media width

Maximum media
lengeth:
1371.5 mm (54 in.)
Roll media
50 m (160 ft.)
Maximum plot length

Plotting margins
Roll media
1355 mm (53.3 in.)

Top: 3mm, Bottom: 3mm, Left: 3mm, Right: 3mm
Media cutting method
Manual cutting across the media
Head height adjustment
2 levels: Nomal and High
Distance accuracy
The larger value either 0.25 mm or 0.1% of moving distance

Used media: Roll MF-3G
Plot length: 1355.5 mm (4.45 ft.)
Operating temperature: 22 to 30C (71.6 to 86F)
Operating humidity: 40 to 60%
PG: Low
Plot mode: Graphics1
Right angle accuracy
0.1mm or less against the moving distance (500.0mm)

Used media: Roll MF-3G
Operating temperature: 22 to 30C (71.6 to 86F)
Operating humidity: 40 to 60%
Plot mode: Graphics1
Rev.-01
3-2
3 Specifications
Item
Specifications
CPU
64Bit RISC CPU
Memory
128MB
Command
MH-RTL (RTL-PASS)
Interface
Network Interface (IEEE802.3)
After-heater
OFF / 30 to 50C (86 to 122F)
Platen heater
OFF / 30 to 50C (86 to 122F)
Pre-heater
OFF / 30 to 50C (86 to 122F)
Ink
Supply method
Cartridge
Environmental conditions
Head life expectancy
Tube supply from separate four separated cartridges

Black, cyan, magenta, yellow: 220ml 5ml for each color
6 109 (6 thousand million) dots per nozzle (in case of sequence discharging
under the condition of the temperature of 25C (77F) with no dust)
Operation environment
Temperature: 20C (68F) to 32C (90F)

Humidity: 40% to 60%, with no condensation
Plotting accuracy warranty range
Temperature: 22C (71.6F) to 30C (86F)

Rate of change
Storage
environment
Power source
Temperature: 2C/hour or less

Humidity: 5%/hour or less
Without ink
Temperature: -20C (-4F) to 60C (140F)

Storage period: 6 months
With ink
Temperature: -10C (14F) to 40C (104F)

Storage period: 6 months
Voltage
AC 90 - 132V 10%
Frequency
50Hz/60Hz 1Hz
Power
consumption
During Plotting
1260W or less (when hearter is ON)
During standby
40W or less (when standby hearter is OFF)
Outer dimensions
Height
1218mm (48 in.) * including stand
Width
1875 mm (73.8 in.)
Depth
685 mm (27 in.)
Weight
Main body
58.0 kg (127.8 lb.)
Stand
21.3 kg (46.9 lb)
3-3
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
3.3 Interface Specifications

This section explains the specification of the interfaces Supported for this printer.
3.3.1
Network Interface Specifications

Item
Specifications
Network type
Ethernet IEEE802.3
Network I/F
10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Auto-switching

(RJ-45 connector twist pair cable)
MDI / MDI-X Auto-switching
Corresponding
protcol
TCP/IP
3.4 Options/Supplies List

3.4.1
Options
Name
Model
Scroller / Flange diameter: 3 in. (for VJ-1304)
VJ13-SR3
Sales units
1 box (1 piece per
box)
TIP
The scroller is supplied with the movable media stopper.
3.4.2
Supplies
(1) Ink Cartridges

Name
Model
Sales units
Ink cartridge K (Black: 220ml 5ml)
VJ-MSINK3 BK220
1 box (1 piece per box)
Ink cartridge C (Cyan: 220ml 5ml)
VJ-MSINK3 CY220
Ink cartridge M (Magenta: 5ml)
VJ-MSINK3 MA220
Ink cartridge Y (Yellow: 5ml)
VJ-MSINK3 YE220
Cleaning cartridge
VJ-MSINK3-CL220
Rev.-01
3-4
3 Specifications
(2) Other Supplies

Name
Model
Sales units
Waste fluid box
RJ8000-HEB
Polyester-knit wiper (for wipng

cleaning wiper)
PJ-POLYNITW
1 box
(300 pieces per box)
3-5
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
3.5
Choosing a Place for the Printer

WARNING
Do not place the printer in a location under the following conditions. Doing so may cause
the product to fall, become damaged, or cause injury.
Unstable surfaces
Slanted areas
Locations that are subject to vibration from other product
Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it.
Doing so may cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth.
Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire.
Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Failure to do so may result in
electrical shock or fire.
(1) Installation Environment Requirements

Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements of the table below.
Table 3-1 Installation Environment Requirements List
Floor loading capability
2940Pa (300kgf/m2) or over
Electrical
Voltage
specifications
AC 90 V - 120 V 10%
Frequency
50/60Hz 1Hz
Capacity
10A or more
Environmental conditions
Rev.-01
Temperature
Humidity
Operation
environment
20 C (68F) to 32C (86F)
40% to 60%, with no condensation
Plotting accuracy
warranty range
22C (71.6F) to 30C (86F)
40% to 60%, with no condensation
Rate of change
2C/hour or less
5%/hour or less
3-6
3 Specifications
NOTE
Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, Plotted images may appear
differently from what you expect.
Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected, even though the
condition is within the range specified
Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected
Places where air conditioners blow directly
MUTOH recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning can be adjusted
easily.
(2) Required Space

Install the printer on a flat surface that fulfills the following conditions.
The place to install printer with the optional stand should have enough loading capacity.
NOTE
For the printer and the optional stand, refer to"3.2 Product Specifications" p.3-2.
When maintaining the printer, 1000 mm of space is required on the left side of the printer in
addition to the spaces shown below.
a=500mm
b=1000mm
c=1000mm
d=1000mm
e=1440mm
f=3000mm
g=2660mm
e
a
d
b
* Do not use VJ-1304 without stand.
3-7
Rev.-01
3 Specifications
Rev.-01
3-8
4 Parts Replacement
4 Parts Replacement
4.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 4- 4
4.2
Removal of Covers ................................................................................. 4- 5

4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover ................................................................ 4-6
4.2.2 Removing Operation Panel Unit .................................................... 4-9
4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover ............................................................... 4-10
4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover................................................. 4-11
4.2.5 Removing Front Cover................................................................. 4-12
4.2.6 Removing Top Cover ................................................................... 4-13
4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F ............................................................ 4-14
4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2.......................................................... 4-15
4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R) .............................................. 4-16
4.2.10 Assembling of Scroller Receiver L and R .................................... 4-18
4.3
Replacement of Board Base Section Components ........................... 4- 21

4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan.............................. 4-21
4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket .................................................... 4-22
4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly ................................................. 4-26
4.3.4 Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly................................ 4-27
4.3.5 Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly .............................. 4-29
4.3.6 Replacing Power Board Assembly............................................... 4-31
4.3.7 Replacing Fuse ............................................................................ 4-34
4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly............................................................. 4-37
4.4
Replacement of PF Driving Section Components ............................. 4- 40

4.4.1 Replacing PF Motor Assembly..................................................... 4-40
4-1
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4.2 Replacing PF_ENC Assembly...................................................... 4-42

4.4.3 Replacing PF_ENC Scale ............................................................ 4-43
4.4.4 Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly ................................ 4-44
4.5
Replacement of CR Driving Section Components .............................4- 46

4.5.1 CR Motor Assembly...................................................................... 4-46
4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin Point Sensor ............................................... 4-47
4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor ............................................................... 4-49
4.5.4 Replacing T Fence ....................................................................... 4-50
4.5.5 Replacing CR Driven Pulley and CR belt ..................................... 4-53
4.5.6 Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly .............................................. 4-54
4.6
Replacement of Head Section Components .......................................4- 56

4.6.1 Replacing Print Head.................................................................... 4-56
4.6.2 Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly............................................... 4-61
4.7
Replacement of Maintenance Section Components ..........................4- 66

4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly ...................................... 4-66
4.7.2 Replacing Maintenance Assembly ............................................... 4-70
4.7.3 Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper) .................................. 4-71
4.8
Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components..............................4- 73

4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly............................................ 4-73
4.8.2 Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly................................................... 4-75
4.8.3 Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly .............................................. 4-78
4.8.4 Replacing Heater Junction Board................................................. 4-80
4.9
Replacement of Frame Section Components .....................................4- 82

4.9.1 Replacing Suction Fan Assembly................................................. 4-82
Rev.-01
4-2
4 Parts Replacement
4.9.2 Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly......................................... 4-83

4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components .......................... 4- 84
4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly.................................................... 4-84
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube ...................................................................... 4-86
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire ............................................................. 4-89
4.11 Replacing Accessory Unit.................................................................... 4- 92
4.11.1 Replacing Level Switch (Waste Fluid) ......................................... 4-92
4.12 Replacing Take Up Unit........................................................................ 4- 93
4.12.1 Removing Tension Arm ............................................................... 4-93
4.12.2 Removing Take Up Unit Fixing Plate ........................................... 4-95
4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover .................................................... 4-96
4.12.4 Replacing Scroller........................................................................ 4-98
4.12.5 Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly ...................... 4-99
4.12.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor .................................. 4-107
4.12.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take Up Unit Motor Assembly 4-110
4-3
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on removal and replacement of service parts.
WARNING
Before starting part replacement, always perform the following operations.

Turn OFF the machine power.
Remove the power plug from the outlet.
Otherwise, you may suffer electric shock or the system circuit may be damaged.
Remove any cables connected to the machine.
Otherwise, the machine may be damaged.
CAUTION
The components in the machine can be disassembled only if so instructed in this manual.
Do not disassemble the frame components and other components that are not instructed to
disassemble in the manual.
The machine has been assembled in the MUTOH factory with extremely high precision up
to 1/100mm. If disassembled inappropriately, it may not restore its normal functionality.
NOTE
After replacing any service parts, perform necessary lubrication and bonding following the
instructions in section "8.4 Lubrication/Bonding" p.8-7.
Upper
Rear
Left
Right
Front
Lower
Rev.-01
4-4
4 Parts Replacement
4.2 Removal of Covers

Before replacing any service parts in the machine, you must remove some external covers.
This section describes the procedure to remove covers.
9
8 (Rear side)
3
6
Table 4-1 Cover Component List

No.
Part name
L side cover
Front cover
Media guide F
R side cover
Waste fluid bottle
I/H cover
Operation panel unit assembly
Media guide R2 (rear side)
Top cover
4-5
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.1
Removing R Side Cover
1. Move down the pressure lever backward.
No.
1
Part name
Pressure lever cap
Pressure lever cap screw

(M4 10, P tight binding)
2. Remove the pressure lever cap-retaining screw (M4 10, P tight binding: 1).
3. Remove the R side cover outer screw (Tapping screw M4 8, S tight cup: 2).
No.
1
Rev.-01
4-6
Part name
R side cover
Waste fluid unit cover
R side cover outer screw

(M4 8, P tight cup)
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the waste fluid unit cover-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 2)
No.
Part name
Waste fluid cover
waste fluid unit cover-retaining

screw (Tapping screw M3 6, S
tight cup: 2)
5. Remove the waste fluid unit cover.

6. Open the front cover.
7. Remove the R side cover inner screw (tapping screw M4 12, P tight binding black: 2).
No.
Part name
R side cover
R side cover inner screw

(tapping screw M4 12, P tight
binding black)
8. Remove the R side cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 12, S tight cup: 2).
1
No.
2
4-7
Part name
R side cover
R side cover rear screw

(tapping screw M4 12, S tight
cup)
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
9. Return the pressure lever forward and remove the R side cover to the upper right direction.
10. Replace the parts inside the product.
11. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
Rev.-01
4-8
4.2.2
4 Parts Replacement
Removing Operation Panel Unit

TIP
Before removing the operation panel unit, perform the following work.
Removing the R side cover:
"4.2.1 Removing R Side Cover" p.4-6
Unlocking and moving the carriage.
1. Remove the operation panel unit tape wire (FFC).

CAUTION
Before replacing board or connecting/removing tape wire (FFC), unplug the power cable
and leave the printer for a while. Or board may be damaged by overcurrent.
When connecting or removing the tape wire (FFC) to the operation panel unit connector,
always pull or push the wire perpendicularly to the connector. Pulling or pushing the wire
slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors, resulting in a
breakdown of the on-board devices.
You can connect/remove the tape wire up to five times.
2. Release the tab on the rear side of the operation panel unit from the panel stay.
3
1
Insert a hand from here.
No.
bottom view
Part name
Operation panel unit
Panel stay
Operation panel unit-retaining tab
3. Remove the operation panel unit.

4-9
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.3
Removing L Side Cover
1. Remove the L side cover front screw (tapping screw M4 12, P tight binding black: 2).
2
No.
Part name
L side cover
L side cover inner screw

binding black)
2. Remove the L side cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 8, S tight cup: 2).
3. Remove the L side cover right screw (tapping screw M4 8, S tight cup: 2).
NOTE
Before removing the scroller receiver side screw, remove the following part.
"4.2.9 Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)" p.4-16
Scroller receiver L:
4. Remove the L side cover scroller receiver side screw (tapping screw M4 12, P tight binding black: 1).
1
No.
2
5. Remove the L side cover.

Rev.-01
4-10
Part name
L side cover
L side cover rear screw

(tapping screw M4 8, S tight cup)
L side cover right screw

L side cover scroller receiver side

screw (back side)
binding black)
4.2.4
4 Parts Replacement
Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover
NOTE
Before removing the ink holder (I/H) cover, remove the following parts.
R side cover:
1. Remove the ink cartridge.

2. Remove the I/H cover rear screw (tapping screw M4 8, S tight cup: 2).
No.
Part name
I/H cover
I/H cover screw

3. Remove the scroller receiver.

4. Remove the I/H cover side (scroller receiver side) screw (tapping screw M4 12, P tight binding black:
1).
No.
Part name
I/H cover
I/H cover side screw

binding black)
2
5. Remove the I/H cover.
4-11
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.5
Removing Front Cover

2. Remove the front cover by pulling it toward the direction of the arrow shown below.
No.
Part name
Front cover
Front cover receiver
NOTE
Do not remove the front cover by force.It may damage or deform the resin.

Rev.-01
4-12
4.2.6
4 Parts Replacement
Removing Top Cover
NOTE
Before removing the top cover, remove the following parts.
Front cover:
"4.2.5 Removing Front Cover" p.4-12
1. Remove the top cover front side-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 5: 2).
1
No.
2
Part name
Top cover
Top cover front side screw

(round head spring screw M3 5)
2. Remove the top cover rear side-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 5: 7).
No.
2
Part name
Top cover
Top cover rear side screw

(round head spring screw M3 5)
3. Remove the top cover.

4-13
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.7
Removing Media Guide F
1. Remove the media guide F lower-side screw (cup screw M3 6 Ni-3bk: 10).
2
No.
2
Part name
Media guide F
Media guide F screw

(cup screw M3 6 Ni-3bk)
2. Remove the media guide F top screw (platen-retaining screw NX: 4, cup screw M3 6 Ni-3bk: 1) and
media guide F right cover and left cover screw (cup screw M3 6 Ni-3bk: 6).
2
No.
3
3
3
Part name
Media guide F
Media guide F top screw

(platen-retaining screw NX)
Media guide F right cover and left

cover screw
(cup screw M3 6 Ni-3bk)
3. Remove the media guide F. In the removing process, remove the after-heater AFT_H cable assembly
inside the media guide F, and after-thermistor AFT_T cable assembly.
NOTE
The spacers are attached to the media guide F top screws except the center one. When fasten the
screws, attach the spacers.
Rev.-01
4-14
4.2.8
4 Parts Replacement
Removing Media Guide R2
1. Remove the media guide R2-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 11). The number of
screws varies depending on models.
No.
Part name
Rear cover
Media guide R2-retaining

screw
cup)
2. Remove the media guide R2 by pulling it backward.

4-15
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.9
Removing Scroller Receiver (L, R)
1. Remove the scroller receiver L-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 2).
No.
Part name
Scroller receiver L screw

cup)
Scroller receiver L
1
2
2. Remove the scroller receiver L.

3. Remove the scroller receiver L-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 2).
4. Remove the scroller receiver R.

Rev.-01
4-16
No.
Part name
Scroller receiver R screw

cup)
Scroller receiver R
4 Parts Replacement
NOTE
There are two hole to attach the scroller receiver on the frame side. See the right of illustration below
for the hole for VJ-1304. Make sure that the part is attached to the appropriate position.
No.
Part name
Attachment hole for scroller receiver of VJ-1304
Screw holes for fixing scroller receiver
4-17
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.2.10 Assembling of Scroller Receiver L and R

NOTE
Before assembling scroller receiver, remove the following part.
Scroller receiver:
1. Attach the two position adjustment scroller roller shafts to the part A shown below of scroller receiver L
(or R). Make sure that the attachment direction is the same in the figure below.
No.
1
Part name
Scroller roller shaft R
Scroller receiver L
2. Put the scroller receiver roller on the scroller roller shafts R.
No.
Part name
Scroller receiver roller
NOTE
Scroller roller shaft R is easy-to-fall. Do not let the shaft fall by pressing or slanting it with a finger.
Rev.-01
4-18
4 Parts Replacement
3. From the other side of scroller receiver L (or R) explained in step 1 and 2, insert the scroller receiver R
and fix the scroll receiver roller set in step 2.
No.
Part name
Scroller receiver L
4. Remove the position adjustment scroller roller shaft R set in step 1.
No.
2
Part name
Remove the scroller roller

shaft R in this position.
Attached scroller receiver

roller
5. Set the scroller receiver roller to the position B and C in the figure below. Make sure that the rollers are
set on the appropriate position of the scroller receiver R (or L).
1
No.
Part name
Scroller receiver rollers
Scroller receiver R
4-19
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. From the other side of the scroller receiver R (or L) as shown below, insert the scroller roller shaft R and
fix the scroller receiver roller.
No.
Rev.-01
4-20
Part name
Scroller receiver R
4 Parts Replacement
4.3 Replacement of Board Base Section Components

This section describes replacement procedures of power board assembly, main board assembly, and cooling
fan.
CAUTION
When you handle a circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands.
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements.
4.3.1
Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan
(1) Removing Connector Panel

1. Remove the cooling fan (5V) cable from the clamp.
2. Remove the cooling fan (5V) connector.
3. Remove the connector panel screw (tapping screw M3 6, S cup: 2).
No.
3
Part name
Connector panel
Connector panel screw

(tapping screw M3 6, S cup)
Cooling fan (5V)
4. Remove the connector panel.
4-21
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Cooling Fan (5V)

1. Remove the cooling fan (5V) cable from the clamp.
2. Remove the cooling fan (5V) connector.
3. Remove the fan bracket screw (tapping screw M3 6, S cup: 2).
No.
Part name
Connector panel
Fan bracket screw

Cooling fan (5V)
4. Remove the cooling fan screw (round head spring screw M3 20: 2) from the fan bracket.
5. Replace the cooling fan.
4.3.2
Removing Main Board Bracket
NOTE
Before replacing the board assemblies, remove the following parts.
Media guide R2:
"4.2.8 Removing Media Guide R2" p.4-15
Connector panel:
"4.3.1 Removing Connector Panel and Cooling Fan" p.4-21
1. Remove the following connectors from the main board assembly.

CAUTION
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the main board assembly
connector, always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the
connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the on-board elements.
Rev.-01
4-22
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-2 Connectors to Main Board Assembly

No.
Connector
No.
# of pins
Color
Connect to
Remarks
J1
14
White
Power board assembly
J5
FFC
Black
Operation panel unit assembly
J9
FFC
Black
CR board assembly J203
Connected to J203 by using CR

tape wire.
J10
FFC
Black
CR board assembly

tape wire.
J11
FFC
Black
CR board assembly

tape wire.
J12
White
PF ENC assembly
J14
Unused
J15
Unused
J16
Unused
10
J17
Unused
11
J20
White
PF motor assembly
12
J21
White
CR motor assembly
13
J22
White
Pump motor assembly
14
J23
Unused
15
J24
White
CR_ORG sensor
16
J25
White
Suction fan 1 assembly
17
J26
Black
18
J27
Black
Wiper origin sensor
19
J28
Red
20
J29
Yellow Suction fan 4 assembly
21
J30
Blue
Lever sensor assembly
22
J28
White
Cooling fan (5V) assembly
23
J29
Red
Waste fluid level switch (VJ16)
24
J36
Red
25
J38
Yellow Cover R sensor
26
J40
Blue
Cover L sensor
27
J41
Unused
28
J42
Black
P_REAR sensor
29
J43
HEATER CONT board
30
J45
Unused
4-23
Connected to CN301 by using

DC cable assembly.
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-2 Connectors to Main Board Assembly (Continued)

Connector
No.
J46
J14
K_INK
J16
M_INK
J15
C_INK
J17
Y_INK
J18
REV_INK1
J33
W SENSE R
Natural HEATER CONT board

color
J12
PF ENC
J32
C FAN1
J40
COVER_L
J34
C FAN2
J42
P_REAR_
SENS
W SENSE L
J30
J37
LEVER SENS REV SENS1
TO CR J201
J11
TO CR J202
J10
J36
C FAN3(+24V)
TO CR J203
J9
J41
DEBUG
J39
REV SENS2
J44
isp JTAG
J7
MAIN board assembly

J23
SODIMM 128MB
J43
SERIAL REV
J20
J2
SYSTEM
FPGA JTAG
PF
MOTOR
J4
isp-CLK- JTAG
J21
J38
COVER_R
OPTION IF
J8
PANEL
J5
J19
REV_INK2
J35
WIPE_ORG
Remarks
CR
MOTOR
J27
Connect to
J22
J24
CR_ORG
Color
PUMP2
31
# of pins
PUMP1
No.
J6
J13
2. Remove the cable from the three clamps on the main board bracket.
No.
Part name
Board bracket
Clamp
3. Remove the following parts (if needed);

a. AC cable between terminal block and Main board assembly
b. DC cable between Main board assembly and CNT
c. Serial cable assembly between Main board assembly and CNT
Rev.-01
4-24
J26
BLOWER
FAN2
J25
BLOWER
FAN1
J29
BLOWER
FAN4
J28
BLOWER
FAN3
J1
J46
To CONT_PS
ETHER
NET
USB IF
POWER SUPPLY
J3
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the board bracket-retaining screws (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 5).
2
1
2
No.
Part name
Main board bracket
Main board bracket-retaining screw

5. Slide the main board bracket to the right then lift from the front side and remove it.
4-25
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.3.3
Replacing Main Board Assembly
NOTE
When replacing the main board assembly, make sure to back up the parameters by following the
instructions in "7.3.1 Parameter Backup" p.7-10. Otherwise, the life counters on the waste fluid
box or the tube cannot be updated and ink may overflow inside the machine.
Perform other adjustments by following the instructions in "7.2 Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
Before replacing the main board assembly, remove the following parts.
Media guide R2:
Connector panel:
Board bracket:
"4.3.2 Removing Main Board Bracket" p.4-22
1. Remove the screws retaining the main board assembly to the board bracket (cup screw M3 6: 7)
.
No.
Part name
Main board assembly
Main board assembly screw

(cup screw M3 6)
2. Replace the main board assembly

4. Install the parameters and firmware by following the instructions in "7.3 Working with MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant" p.7-8 and "7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance" p.730.
5. Perform adjustment on media edge sensor and the P_REAR sensor by following the instructions in "7.2
Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
Rev.-01
4-26
4.3.4
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing HEATER CONT board assembly
1. Remove the cable from the five brackets at the top of the HEATER CONT board assembly.
1
2
2
No.
Part name
Board bracket
Clamp
2. Remove the following connectors from the HEATER CONT board assembly.
Table 4-3 Connectors to HEATER CONT board assembly
No.
Connector
No.
# of
pins
Color
Connect to
Remarks
J2
Unused
J3
Unused
J4
Unused
J5
Unused
J6
FFC
HEATER RELAY board
J7
Not equipped
J8
White
HEATER JUNCTION board
Connected to J2 by using power

cable assembly between CNT JC.
J9
Serial
HEATER JUNCTION board
Connected to J3 by using serial

cable assembly between MAIN
- CNT.
J10
Serial
Main board assembly
Connected to assembly J43 by

using serial cable between
MAIN - CNT.
10
J11
Unused
11
J12
Unused
12
J13
Unused
4-27
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-3 Connectors to HEATER CONT board assembly (Continued)

No.
Connector
No.
# of
pins
Color
Connect to
Remarks
13
J14
Unused
14
J15
Unused
15
J16
Unused
16
J17
Unused
17
J18
Unused
18
J19
White
Main board assembly
Connected to J46 by using

power cable assembly between
MAIN - CNT.
19
J20
Unused
20
J21
Unused
21
J22
White
Terminal block
AC cable between terminal

block and CNT
22
J23
White
HEATER RELAY
AC cable assembly between

CNT - RLY
3. Replace the following parts;

AC cable assembly between CNT - RLY
Tape wire between CNT - RLY
DC cable assembly between MAIN - CNT
Serial cable between MAIN - CNT
AC cable between CNT - Power unit
DC cable between CNT - Power unit
4. Remove the HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 4), and
remove it.
2
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
HEATER CONT board bracket
HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw

4-28
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the HEATER CONT board-retaining screw (cup screw M3 6 white: 9).
2
No.
Part name
HEATER CONT board

assembly
HEATER CONT board

assembly screw
(cup screw M3 6 white)
6. Replace the HEATER CONT board assembly.

8. Install the firmware for the HEATER CONT board following the instruction in "7.3.7 Sub Controller
Installation" p.7-27.
4.3.5
Replacing HEATER RELAY board assembly
1. Remove the cable from the five clamps on the top of HEATER CONT board bracket.
1
2
2
No.
Part name
Clamp
2. Remove the following connectors from the HEATER RELAY board assembly.
4-29
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-4 Connectors to HEATER RELAY board assembly

No.
Connector
No.
# of
pins
Color
Connect to
J1
White
HEATER CONT board
J2
White
Platen heater 1
J3
FFC
HEATER CONT board

assembly
J4
White
AC-IN
J5
White
Platen heater
J6
White
AC-OUT
J7
White
Pre-heater 1
J8
White
Pre-heater 2
J9
White
After-heater
10
J10
Blue
Cooling fan
11
J12
White
Platen thermistor 1
12
J13
Black
Platen thermistor 2
13
J15
Red
Pre-thermistor
14
J17
White
After-thermistor
Remarks
Connected to J23 by using AC
cable assembly between CNT RLY.
Connected to J6 by using tape

wire between CNT - RLY.
3. Replace the AC cable assembly between CNT-RLY, and RLY_AC cable assembly.
4. Remove the HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screws (tapping screw M3 6 tight cup: 4), and
remove the board bracket.
2
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
HEATER CONT board bracket-retaining screw

(tapping screw M3 6 tight cup: 4)
4-30
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the relay board assembly retaining screws (cup screw M3 6 white: 9).
2
No.
Part name
Relay board assembly
Relay board assembly screw

6. Replace the relay board assembly.

4.3.6
Replacing Power Board Assembly
CAUTION
When removing the power board assembly, remove the power cable and wait for at least
5 minutes before taking it out; this will discharge the residual electrical charge of the
electrolytic capacitor.
If you handle these boards before the capacitor charge is fully discharged, you may suffer
electric shock.
To avoid electric shock, never touch the back of the power board.When handling the
power board, take the side of the board.
To avoid a short circuit, do not place the power board assembly directly on conductive
objects.
NOTE
Before replacing the power board assembly, remove the following parts.
Rear cover:
Connector panel:
4-31
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
1. Remove the following connector from the power board assembly.

Table 4-5 Connectors to Power Board Assembly
No. Connector No. # of pins Color
1
CN301
Connect to
Remarks
White Main board assembly
Connected to J1 by using DC cable

assembly.
2. Remove the following connector from the HEATER-CONT board.

Table 4-6 Connectors to HEATER-CONT Board Assembly
No. Connector No. # of pins Color
1
J22
Connect to
Remarks
White Terminal
Connected to terminal block by

using Terminal block to CNT AC
cable assembly
3. Remove the fuse-side two screws (pan head small screw M4 6) retaining Fuse to terminal block AC
cable assembly, and remove the assembly.
Rev.-01
4-32
No.
Part name
Fuse to terminal block AC cable

assembly
Screws retaining Fuse to

terminal block AC cable
assembly to fuse holder
(pan head small screw M4 6)
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the three cables from clamp of the front side of HEATER-RELAY board bracket.
No.
Part name
HEATER-RELAY board
bracket
Clamp
5. Remove the power board bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6 S tight cup).
2
No.
Part name
Power board bracket
Screw retaining power board bracket
4-33
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the power board assembly-retaining screw (cup screw M3 6 white: 9).
No.
Part name
Power board screw

7. Replace the power board assembly.

4.3.7
Replacing Fuse
CAUTION
Use the Fuse which specification matches as follows.

Specification: 250V 15A, 10.31mm 38.1mm
Double pole/ Neutral Fusing
NOTE
Before replacing fuse, remove the following parts.
Media guide R2:
Rev.-01
4-34
4 Parts Replacement
1. Pick up the fuse using a finger on the center of the part and remove it.
No.
1
Part name
Fuse
2. Replace the fuse.

3. Remove the two screws (pan head small screw M4 6) retaining the noise filter to fuse AC cable
assembly and fuse to terminal block AC cable assembly.
1
No.
Part name
Screws retaining the fuse to

assembly
Fuse to terminal block AC cable

assembly
4. Remove the AC inlet.

"4.3.8 Replacing Inlet Assembly" p.4-37
5. Remove the noise filter to fuse AC cable assembly from AC inlet.
6. Replace the assembly.
4-35
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
7. Remove the protect cover on the top of terminal block, then remove the screws retaining the fuse to
terminal block AC cable assembly to terminal block.
8. Replace the fuse to terminal block AC cable assembly.

Rev.-01
4-36
No.
Part name
Protect cover of terminal block
Screws retaining the fuse to

assembly
4.3.8
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Inlet Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the inlet assembly, remove the following parts.
Media guide R2:
(1) Removing Cooling Fan (24V)

1. Remove the screw retaining the cooling fan (24V) (pan head small screw M 4 30: 2).
No.
1
Part name
Cooling fan (24V) screw

(pan head small screw M 4
30)
Cooling fan (24V)
2. Remove the cooling fan (24V) cable connector.
No.
1
Part name
Cooling fan (24V) connector
3. Replace the cooling fan.

4-37
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
TIP
When reassembling the cooling fan, spread the fan seal (shown in the diagram below) under the
fan, then screw the fan on it
No.
1
Part name
Fan seal
1
Installation direction of the cooling fan assembly (sealing surface and cable pulling direction) is
specified. Install it with the sealing surface facing up.
Rev.-01
4-38
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Inlet Assembly

1. Remove the inlet assembly-retaining screws (round head spring screw (finishing) M3 10: 2).
.
No.
Part name
Inlet assembly connector
Inlet assembly
Inlet assembly screw

(round head spring screw
(finishing) M3 10)
2. Remove the connectors from the inlet assembly.

3. Remove the Inlet fixing board.
.
No.
Part name
Inlet assembly
Inlet fixing board
4. Replace the inlet assembly

TIP
When installing the inlet assembly, match the corresponding color connectors.
4-39
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components

4.4.1
Replacing PF Motor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF motor assembly, remove the following covers.
L side cover:
"4.2.3 Removing L Side Cover" p.4-10
Media guide R2:
1. Remove the PF motor assembly connectors out through the PF motor cable assembly.
1
No.
Part name
PF motor cable
PF motor assembly connector
2. Remove the screw retaining the PF motor to the PF bracket (M4 8 round head spring screw: 2).
No.
1
PF bracket:
PF motor screw
(round head spring screw M4
8)
PF speed reduction belt
Rev.-01
4-40
Part name
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screw (round head spring screw M3 6: 1) retaining PF encoder fixing board t2 to PF
bracket, then remove the PF encoder fixing board t2.
.
No.
1
PF bracket
Screws retaining PF encoder

fixing board t2 (round head
spring screw m3 6)
PF encoder fixing board t2
Part name
NOTE
When removing PF encoder fixing board t2 from the PF bracket, do not damage the PF scale by
contacting with PF ENC assembly. Also, do not bend or touch the outer circumference of PF scale.
4. Remove the four screws (tapping screw M3 6 S tight cup) retaining PF bracket and remove the bracket
with PF motor assembly.
.
No.
2
Part name
PF bracket
Screws retaining PF bracket

(tapping screw M3 6 S tight
cup)
5. Remove the screw retaining the PF motor assembly and replace the assembly.
NOTE
Move the PF speed reduction pulley with your hand to check if the PF speed reduction belt is equally
balanced on the pulley center section of the PF motor assembly.
7. Perform adjustments by following the instructions in "7.2 Adjustment Item" p.7-3.
4-41
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4.2
Replacing PF_ENC Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF_ENC assembly, remove the following covers.
L side cover:
Rear cover:
1. Remove the PF_ENC assembly connectors from the main board assembly.
"4.3.3 Replacing Main Board Assembly" p.4-26
2. Take the PF_ENC assembly cable off the clamp, then pull it out through the L frame cable inlet.
3. Remove the PF_ENC assembly-retaining screw (tapping screw M2 5: 2).
No.
Part name
PF_ENC assembly screw

(tapping screw M2 5)
PF_ENC assembly
NOTE
Do not damage, bend the PF scale, or touch the outer edge of the scale.
4. Replace the PF_ENC assembly.

Rev.-01
4-42
4.4.3
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing PF_ENC Scale
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the PF_ENC scale assembly, remove the following parts.
L side cover:
1. Remove the ENC holder-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, P tight cup).
No.
Part name
ENC holder screw

cup)
PF_ENC scale
ENC holder
2. Replace the PF scale.

NOTE
When handling the PF scale, note the following.
Do not damage or bend the PF scale. Do not touch the peripheral surface of the PF scale.
Make sure that no double-sided tape remains on the slit mounting flange.
4-43
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.4.4
Replacing Heater and Thermistor Assembly
(1) Replacing After-heater

1. Remove the media guide F.
"4.2.7 Removing Media Guide F" p.4-14
2. Remove the connectors from both AFT_H relay assembly and AFT_T relay assembly.
3. Remove the after-heater and thermistor.
No.
Part name
After-heater
Thermistor assembly
NOTE
Wipe the grease away from the heater attachment area before installing it.
(2) Replacing Pre-heater

1. Remove the media guide R2.
2. Remove the connectors for PRE_H relay assembly and PRE_H2 relay assembly.
NOTE
Replace the pre-heater while media guide R1 is attached to the printer.
Rev.-01
4-44
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the media guide stay b-retaining screw (cup screw M3 6 Ni-3 bk: 5), and remove the media
guide stay b.
No.
Part name
Media guide stay b
Media guide stay b-retaining

screw (cup screw M3 6 Ni-3
bk)
No.
Part name
4. Remove the pre-heater and thermistor assembly.
Media guide R1
Pre-heater
Thermistor assembly
NOTE
Wipe the grease away from the heater attachment area before installing it.
4-45
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components

4.5.1
CR Motor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the CR motor assembly, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
L side cover:
1. Detach the CR motor assembly connector from the cable connector.

2. Take the CR motor assembly cable off the clamp.
3. Release the CR locker by pushing it with your finger, then move the carriage from the capping position
to the left.
4. Loosen the CR tension mounting shaft on the R side frame, then release the CR belt tension.
No.
Part name
CR belt
CR tension mounting shaft
5. Take the CR belt off the CR motor assembly pulley on the L side frame.
Rev.-01
4-46
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the screws retaining the CR motor assembly to the CR motor mounting material (cup screw M4
8: 4).
No.
Part name
CR motor mounting
material
CR motor screw
(cup screw M4 8)
CR motor
7. Replace the CR motor assembly.

4.5.2
Replacing CR Origin Point Sensor
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the CR_HP sensor assembly, remove the R side cover.
R side cover:
to the left.
4-47
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Pull out the CR_HP cable assembly connector from the CR_HP sensor.
No.
3
Part name
Hook
CR_HP sensor
Connector
3. Release the hook retaining the CR_HP sensor, then remove the CR_HP sensor.
4. Replace the CR_HP sensor.
Rev.-01
4-48
4.5.3
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Lever Sensor
NOTE
Before replacing the lever sensor, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
1. Move down the pressure lever forward (downward).

2. Detach the lever sensor cable assembly connector from the lever sensor.
5
1
No.
Part name
Pressure lever
Lever sensor
Hook
Sensor mounting plate
Lever sensor cable

assembly connector
3. Release the hook retaining the lever sensor, then replace the lever sensor.
4-49
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.5.4
Replacing T Fence
NOTE
Before replacing the T fence, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
L side cover:
1. Remove the T fence spring from T fence spring hook on the L frame side.
No.
Part name
T fence spring
T fence spring hook
2. From the three fence guides, remove the T fences by following instructions in the diagram below.
T fence
Slide the T fence in the order

of arrows shown above to detach.
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
T fence
Fence guide
4-50
side view
Fence guide
4 Parts Replacement
CAUTION
When removing the T fence, note the following.

Do not pull the T fence by force; the fence guide can be easily broken.
Pay attention not to damage or break the T fence.
3. Remove the T fence from the CR rail frame R hook on the R frame side, then pull it out toward the
direction of the arrow in the diagram.
No.
Part name
T fence
T fence hook
4. Replace the T fence.

5. Fold a new T fence to the outside (90 degrees) at the point 9 mm from the edge, then install it to the CR
rail frame hook.
NOTE
Attach the C-cut side of T fence to the origin side of the CR rail frame.
Attach C-cut side

to the origin side.
T fence
4-51
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
6. Insert the T fence into the CR encoder assembly.

2
No.
Part name
T fence
CR encoder assembly
7. Install the T fence to the fence guide.
side view
No.

Part name
T fence
Fence guide
Slide the T fence in the order

of arrows shown above to install.
8. Install the T fence spring to the T fence spring hook on the L frame side.
Rev.-01
4-52
4.5.5
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing CR Driven Pulley and CR belt
NOTE
Before replacing CR driven pulley assembly and CR belt, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
L side cover:
Top cover:
"4.2.6 Removing Top Cover" p.4-13
to the left.
2. Loosen the CR tension mounting shaft on the R side frame, then release the CR belt tension.
5
back-side
No.
Part name
Driven pulley shaft
CR belt
CR driven pulley
Tension spring
CR tension mounting
shaft
2
3
3. Take the CR belt off the CR motor assembly pulley on the L frame side.
4. Replace the CR belt.
5. Remove the CR driven pulley.
6. Remove the CR driven pulley shaft from the CR driven pulley.
NOTE
Installation direction of the driven pulley shaft is specified.Thin shaft side faces down.
Also refer to
"10.6 Exploded View" p.10-9.
After installing the CR driven pulley, move the carriage with your hand from side to side, and
check if the CR belt is equally balanced on the pulley center section of the CR motor assembly.
4-53
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.5.6
Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly
This section describes how to replace the pressure spring, pressure roller assembly, and pressure arm
assembly.
(1) Replacing Pressure Spring

1. Remove the spring attached to pressure bracket and pressure arm using spring hook, tweezers, or
longnose pliers.
No.
2
2. Replace the pressure spring.
Rev.-01
4-54
Part name
Pressure bracket
Pressure arm
Pressure spring
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Pressure Arm Assembly

1. Remove the media guide R2.
2. Remove the media guide stay a screw (cup screw M3 6, Ni-3bk: 5), and tilt it to the far side.
No.
Part name
Pressure arm assembly
Media guide stay a

(at slant angle)
Media guide a-retaining

screw (cup screw M3 6,
Ni-3bk)
3. Remove the pressure spring.

"(1) Replacing Pressure Spring" p.4-54
4. Remove the pressure arm assembly and replace it through the front space of tilted media guide stay a.
4-55
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components

4.6.1
Replacing Print Head
NOTE
Before replacing the print head, remove the R side cover or the top cover.
1. Perform ink discharge operation to discharge ink entirely from the ink paths.
NOTE
Cover the platen surface by placing media before performing ink discharging so that the ink does not
spill on the platen directly.
TIP
"5.7.9 HeadWash Menu" p.5-44
2. Initialize the shot count of the print head.

to the left.
4. Remove the CR board cover-retaining screw (M3 8, S tight cup: 1).
No.
2
Rev.-01
4-56
Part name
CR board cover screw

(M3 8, S tight cup)
CR board cover
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the CR board cover.

6. Remove the cable cover L-retaining screw ( round head spring screw M3 8 W sems: 2) (tapping screw
M3 8, S tight cup: 1).
No.
3
Part name
Cable cover L screw

(M3 8 round head
spring screw W sems)
Cable cover L
Cable cover L screw

(M3 8, S tight cup)
7. Remove the cable cover R-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 8, S tight cup: 2) (round head spring
screw M3 8 W sems: 1).
3
No.
Part name
Cable cover R
Cable cover R screw

(M3 8 round head
spring screw W sems: 1)
Cable cover R screw

(M3 8, S tight cup: 2)
8. Remove the cable cover.
4-57
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
9. While rotating the damper fixing material, remove the eight ink tubes from the damper fixing material
hook.
No.
1
Part name
Ink tube
Damper fixing material
10. Remove the damper fixing material.

11. Remove the eight damper assemblies connected to the print head that needs to be replaced, with a flathead driver.
CAUTION
Do not press the transparent film on the damper assembly with your hand. Doing so may
discharge the ink filled inside the damper assembly.
Be careful not to damage the transparent film on the damper assembly.
NOTE
When removing the damper assembly, note the following.
To easily remove the damper assembly, insert a flat-head driver between the carriage and the
damper assembly left protruding part, then pry out the damper assembly.
To avoid residual ink leakage, place the removed damper on a rag.
Rev.-01
4-58
4 Parts Replacement
No.
Part name
Flat-head driver insertion point
Damper assembly
12. Remove the damper locating material-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 6 W sems: 2).
1
No.
Part name
Damper locating material
Damper locating material screw

6 W sems)
13. Remove the damper locating material.

14. Remove the print head from the carriage.
No.
Part name
Print head
Head tape wire
15. Remove the two head tape wire from the print head.
4-59
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
CAUTION
The QR code label on the print head should be written down for later use or kept in a safe
place.
Do not touch the nozzles of the print head. Make sure that the nozzles do not get any dust.
When connecting or removing the tape wire (FFC), always pull or push the wire
perpendicularly to the connector.Pulling or pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/
break the terminals in the connectors, resulting in a breakdown of the print head.
The folding orientation of the FFC (tape wire) differs between head side and the CR board
side.Make sure to attach the tape wire in the appropriate orientation.
16. Replace the print head.

Rev.-01
4-60
4.6.2
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly
(1) Replacing Cutter Holder Assembly

NOTE
Before replacing parts in the cutter holder assembly, remove the following parts referring to the
instructions shown below.
Removing the cable cover L, R: refer to "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-56
Removing the P_EDGE sensor, cutter sensor connector: refer to "4.10.1 Replacing CR Board
Assembly" p.4-84
1. Release the sensor cables in the front of the cutter holder assembly from the clamps (3 points) on the front
of the cutter holder assembly.
5
No.
Part name
Clamp
Cutter holder assembly screw

8 W sems)
Cutter holder assembly
Height adjusting lever screw
Height adjusting lever
2. Remove the height adjusting lever spring from the height adjusting lever.
3. Remove the cutter holder-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 8 W sems: 2).
4. Remove the cutter holder assembly from the carriage.
5. Replace the parts.
4-61
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assembly

1. Remove the cutter holder assembly.
2. Push the tab of the CR lock kicker with a sharp-pointed tool or a flat-head driver to remove the CR lock
kicker.

No.
Part name
Cutter solenoid assembly ironcore
Cutter solenoid spring
Cutter solenoid assembly
CR lock kicker
CR lock kicker tab
3. Remove the cutter solenoid assembly iron-core and the cutter solenoid spring.
4. While opening the cutter holder assembly upper tab, push out the cutter solenoid assembly from the cutter
holder assembly bottom with a flat-head driver, then remove it.
5. Remove the cutter solenoid terminal connector.
6. Replace the cutter solenoid assembly.
Rev.-01
4-62
4 Parts Replacement
NOTE
When installing the cutter solenoid, note the following.
Joint the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker, push down the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker
together to install them onto the cutter holder.
No.
Part name
CR lock kicker
Cutter cap
Make sure to join the cutter cap and the CR lock kicker.Otherwise, when turning the power ON,
the carriage cannot move from the origin point to the left.
4-63
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(3) Replacing CR_ENC Assembly

2. Remove the CR_ENC assembly-retaining screw (round head spring screw M 3 8 W sems: 1).
No.
3. Detach the cable from the three clamps.

4. Remove the CR_ENC assembly.
Rev.-01
4-64
Part name
Mounting plate screw
CR_ENC assembly
CR_ENC assembly screw

(round head spring screw M 3
8 W sems)
4 Parts Replacement
(4) Replacing P_EDGE Sensor Assembly

2. Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly-retaining screw (M3 6, P tight cup: 1).
No.
Part name
P_EDGE sensor assembly

screw
(M3 6, P tight cup)
P_EDGE sensor assembly

3. Detach the cable from the three clamps.
4. Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly.
4-65
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.7 Replacement of Maintenance Section Components

4.7.1
Removing Maintenance Base Assembly
NOTE
When replacing the parts inside the maintenance assembly, make sure to clear the following
counter parameters.
Waste Ink or Cleaning:
"6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-4
Before replacing the parts in the pump cap assembly, remove the following parts.
R side cover:
Ink holder cover:
"4.2.4 Removing Ink Holder (I/H) Cover" p.4-11
Scroller receiver:
1. Enter CR maintenance confirmation mode using operation panel, then turn the printer power off.
Confirm that the cleaner head is positioned in the front side.
"Operation Manual"
No.
Pull near side
Rev.-01
4-66
Part name
Pump cap assembly
Cleaner head
4 Parts Replacement
2. Pull up the pressure lever.
No.
1
Part name
Pressure lever
3. Remove the lock bracket-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S cup tight: 1).
No.
Part name
Head lock-retaining screw

(tapping screw M3 6, S cup
tight)
Head lock
4. Remove the cable on the maintenance base 1 from the clamps.
No.
Part name
Motor relay connector
Clamp
4-67
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
5. Remove the motor relay connector.

6. Remove the wiper phase sensor connector.
No.
Part name
Wiper phase sensor connector
Pump unit
7. Remove the maintenance base 1 front part-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 2).
Rev.-01
4-68
No.
Part name
Maintenance base 1-retaining

screw (tapping screw M3 6, S
tight cup)
Maintenance base 2
4 Parts Replacement
8. Remove the maintenance base 1 rear part-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 2).
No.
Part name
Maintenance base 1-retaining

screw (tapping screw M3 6, S
tight cup)
Maintenance base 1
9. Hold the maintenance base 1 up and rotate it to remove as shown below.
4-69
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.7.2
Replacing Maintenance Assembly
This section describes how to replace the maintenance assembly.

Maintenance assembly consists of pump cap assembly, frame cap, cap slider, cap head, and cap spring.
NOTE
Before removing the pump cap assembly, remove the following parts.
R side cover:
Maintenance base assembly:

Ink holder cover:
"4.7.1 Removing Maintenance Base Assembly" p.4-66
1. Remove the screw retaining the maintenance assembly to the maintenance base 1 (round head spring
screw M3 6: 4).
1
No.
(Back)
Part name
Maintenance assembly screw
Maintenance base 1
Maintenance assembly
2
1
2. Remove the maintenance assembly from the maintenance base 1.

3. Attach a new maintenance assembly to the maintenance base 1.
4. Insert the tube into the drain guide 2.
No.
1
Rev.-01
4-70
Part name
Tube
Drain guide 2
4 Parts Replacement
5. Attach the maintenance base 1 to where it is.

4.7.3
Replacing Cleaner Head (Cleaning Wiper)
NOTE
Before replacing the cleaner head, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
1. Remove the cleaner head from the cleaner head by using tweezers, and lift it from the holder upward.
2
No.
Part name
Pump cap assembly
Cleaning wiper
NOTE
To remove the wiper, use the tweezers to unhook the lower hook of the wiper.
Hook
2. Replace the cleaner head.

4-71
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
NOTE
When removing the cleaner head, note the following.
Do not touch the cleaner head with your bare hands.
Make sure that the cleaner head get no dust or oil.
Install the cleaner head so that the point of the cleaner head is located to the observer's right side.
No.
2
1
Part name
Cleaner head
Head point
Insert the cleaner head into the holder to the full depth securely and hook it.
Rev.-01
4-72
4 Parts Replacement
4.8 Replacement of Ink Supply Section Components

Four Ink Holder (I/H) assemblies are installed in this product. The replacement procedures for one of these
I/H assemblies are explained in this section.
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the I/H assembly, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
I/H cover:
4.8.1

Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly
TIP
2. Remove the ink sensor assembly connector (4 pieces) from the main board assembly.
TIP
3. Take the removed sensor assembly cable off the clamp (2 points).
No.
1
Part name
Clamp
I/H assembly
4-73
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the joint screw (M6) connecting the I/H assembly and the SUS pipe, and remove the o-ring
inside.
No.
Part name
Joint screw
I/H assembly
5. Remove the screw retaining the I/H assembly to the I/H base (tapping screw M3 10, S cup: 2).
6. Replace the I/H assembly.
NOTE
When attaching the part, make sure the followings:
When tighten the joint screw, use the optional jig and pay attention to the fastening torque.
"10.4 Jigs and Tools" p.10-8
Used O-ring become deformed. Do not use the O-ring removed and attach the new one.
Rev.-01
4-74
4.8.2
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing Ink Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the ink ID sensor assembly, remove the following parts.
I/H assembly:
"4.8.1 Replacing Ink Holder (I/H) Assembly" p.4-73
1. Detach the ink ID sensor assembly cable from the hooks (2 pieces) on the back of the I/H assembly.
2. Remove the screw retaining the holder pressure spring to the IC holder mounting plate (P tight cup M3
6 Ni-3: 2).
No.
1
3
Part name
Holder pressure spring
IC holder mounting plate
Holder pressure spring screw

(P tight cup M3 6 Ni-3)
3. Remove the screw retaining the ink END sensor to the holder mounting plate (tapping screw M3 10, S
cup: 1).
No.
Part name
Ink END sensor screw

Ink END sensor
4-75
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4. Release the tab of the frame assembly needle, push down and slide it sideways (see the directions of the
arrows), then remove the cartridge frame assembly.
No.
Part name
Frame assembly needle
Frame assembly needle tab
5. Remove the screw retaining the ink NOT sensor to the I/H assembly (M2 8, S tight binding: 1).
No.
Rev.-01
4-76
Part name
Ink NOT sensor
Ink NOT sensor screw

(M2 8, S tight binding)
4 Parts Replacement
6. Replace the ink cable assembly.

NOTE
When reassembling the unit, note the following sensor fastening torque.
Ink NOT sensor: Slight overtorque may damage the parts. Gradually torque the sensor to avoid
tightening it too much.
Confirm that the switch is not stuck when it is pressed.
Ink END sensor: Tighten the sensor to avoid rattling.
4-77
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.3
Replacing Cover Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing the cover sensor assembly, remove the parts as follows.
1. Remove the screw retaining the sensor cover (L/R) to the frame (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 1 per
cover). (The diagram below shows the sensor cover R).
No.
2. Remove the cover sensor connector from the main board.

Rev.-01
4-78
Part name
Sensor cover R
Sensor cover R screw

cup)
4 Parts Replacement
3. Detach the cable from the cover (L/R) sensor cable-retaining clamp.(The diagram below shows the cover
R sensor).
2
No.
Part name
Clamp
Cover R sensor cable
4. Replace the cover sensor assembly.

4-79
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.8.4
Replacing Heater Junction Board
NOTE
Before replacing the heater junction board, remove the parts as follows.
1. Remove the following connectors shown in the table below from the heater junction board.
Table 4-7 Connectors to Heater junction board
No.
Connector
No.
# of
pins
Color
Connect to
Remarks
J2
White
HEATER CONT board
Connected to J8 by using power

cable between CNT - JC.
J3
HEATER CONT board
Connected to J9 by using serial

cable between MAIN - CNT.
J5
10
White
INK K
Connected with INK cable

assembly (VJ12).
J6
10
White
INK C

assembly (VJ12).
J7
10
White
INK M

assembly (VJ12).
J8
10
White
INK Y

assembly (VJ12).
J9
Unused
J10
Unused
J11
Unused
10
J12
Unused
11
J13
Unused
12
J14
Unused
13
J15
Unused
14
J16
Unused
15
J17
Unused
16
J18
Unused
17
J19
Unused
18
J20
Unused
19
J21
Unused
20
J22
Unused
21
J23
Unused
Rev.-01
4-80
4 Parts Replacement
Table 4-7 Connectors to Heater junction board

No.
Connector
No.
22
J24
# of
pins
Color
Connect to
Remarks
Unused
2. Replace the power cable between CNT - JC and serial cable between MAIN - CNT.
3. Remove the screw retaining the heater junction board (cup screw M3 6, white: 4).
1
No.
Part name
Heater junction board

assembly
Heater junction assembly

screw
(cup screw M3 6, white)
4. Replace the heater junction board.

5. To remove the unit, reverse the removal procedure.
4-81
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.9 Replacement of Frame Section Components

4.9.1
Replacing Suction Fan Assembly
1. Remove the screw retaining the fan plate to the B frame (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 3), then
remove the suction fan assembly.
No.
Part name
Fan plate screw (M3 6, S tight

cup)
Fan plate
2. Remove the suction fan assembly cable connector, then remove the suction fan assembly from the B
frame.
No.
2
3
Part name
Suction fan cable connector
Suction fan screw (M4 8 pan

head small screw)
Suction fan
Suction fan screw (M4 40

round head spring screw
finishing)
Fan duct
Fan duct screw (M4 5 pan

head small screw)
3. Remove the screw retaining the fan duct (pan head small screw M4 5: 2), then remove the fan duct.
4. Remove the suction fan assembly retaining-screw (round head spring screw M4 40 finishing: 1) (pan
head small screw M4 8: 1).
5. Replace the suction fan assembly
Rev.-01
4-82
4.9.2
4 Parts Replacement
Replacing P_REAR Sensor Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing parts in the P_REAR sensor assembly, remove the following covers.
Rear cover:
1. Remove the PF_REAR sensor assembly connector from the main board assembly.
2. Take the P_REAR sensor assembly cable off the clamp.
3. Remove the screw retaining the PE sensor plate to the frame (tapping screw M3 6, S tight cup: 1).
No.
1
Part name
P_REAR sensor assembly
PE sensor plate screw

cup)
PE sensor plate
4. Remove the screw retaining the P_REAR sensor assembly to the PE sensor plate (cup screw M2 6: 2).
1
No.
Part name

screw (cup screw M2 6)
PE sensor plate
2
3
5. Replace the P_REAR sensor assembly.

4-83
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.10 Replacement of Cable Guide Section Components

4.10.1 Replacing CR Board Assembly
NOTE
Before replacing CR board assembly, remove the following covers.
Top cover:
CR board cover: refer to the instructions up to step 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-56.
1. Remove the following connectors from the CR board assembly.

CAUTION
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the CR board assembly connector,
always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
Table 4-8 Connectors to CR Board Assembly

No.
Connector
No.
# of
pins
Color
Connect to
Remarks
J204
31 pins
Black Print head
Connected to J1.
J205
31 pins
Black Print head
Connected to J2.
J201
31 pins
Black Main board assembly
Connected to J11.
J202
31 pins
Connected to J10.
J203
31 pins
Connected to J9.
J207
4 pins
White CR_ENC assembly
J206
2 pins
White Cutter solenoid assembly
J208
4 pins
Black P_EDGE sensor assembly
J209
3 pins
White
Rev.-01
PG origin point sensor

assembly
4-84
4 Parts Replacement
2. Remove the CR board assembly-retaining screw (tapping screw M3 8, S tight cup: 4).
No.
Part name
CR board screw
cup)
CR board
CR board mounting plate
3. Replace the CR board assembly.

4-85
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube

NOTE
Before replacing the ink tube, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
I/H cover:
Top cover:
Media guide R2:
(1) Preparation of Replacing Ink Tube

2. Remove the tube clamps (3 points).
No.
Part name
Tube guide
Tube clamp
1
2
3. Remove the tube film guide retainers (3 points).
No.
1
2
Rev.-01
4-86
Part name
Tube guide
Tube film guide retainer
4 Parts Replacement
4. Remove the CR board cover.

Up to step 4 in "4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-56
5. Remove the CR tape wire from the CR board.
6. Remove the screw retaining the bearer mounting material and the bearer fixing material (tapping screw
M 3 8, S tight cup: 2) (M3 8, P tight cup: 1).
No.
1
2
3
4
Part name
Bearer mounting material

screw (M3 8, S tight)
Screw retaining the bearer

fixing material (M3 8, P
tight)
Bearer fixing material
7. Remove the bearer mounting material and the bearer fixing material.
(2) Replacing Ink Tube

1. Loosen the joint screw (M6) connecting the ink tube and the F branch.
No.
1
Part name
Joint screw (M6)
F branch
4-87
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Loosen the joint screw (M6) connecting the ink tube and the cartridge pipe.
No.
Part name
Joint screw (M6)
Cartridge pipe
3. Remove the ink tube.

4. Remove the following parts from the ink tube.
Joint screw (M6: 2 pieces)
O-ring, large: (M6: 2 pieces)
5. Replace the ink tube.
NOTE
Used O-ring become deformed. Do not use the O-ring removed and attach the new one.
Rev.-01
4-88
4 Parts Replacement
4.10.3 Replacing CR Tape Wire

CAUTION
When connecting or removing the FFC type cables to the CR board assembly connector,
always pull or push the cables perpendicularly to the connector.
NOTE
Before replacing the CR tape wire, remove the following covers.
R side cover:
L side cover:
I/H cover:
Top cover:
Media guide R2:
CR board cover and the cable clamp:
"4.10.2 Replacing Ink Tube" p.4-86
1. Remove the three CR tape wires from the main board assembly.
2. Take the CR tape wires off the clamps nearby the main board, then pull them out through the R frame
cable inlet.
No.
1
Part name
CR tape wire
Clamp
4-89
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Take the CR tape wire off the clamp (one point) nearby the R frame cable inlet (I/H assembly side).
No.
Part name
CR tape wire
Clamp
4. Remove the bearer holder-retaining screw (round head spring screw M3 6: 2), then remove the bearer
holder.
No.
Part name
Tube holder 2
Bearer holder and bearer

holder screw
6)
No.
Part name
5. Remove the tube holder 1 and the tube holder 2.
Rev.-01
4-90
Tube holder 1
Tube holder 2
4 Parts Replacement
6. Remove the following parts from the I/H backing plate.

Tube guide film
Steel bearer assembly
CR cable (3 cables)
No.
1
2
Part name
Tube guide film
Steel bearer
CR cable
7. Replace the CR cable.

NOTE
When connecting the CR cable, note the following.
The CR cable has three layers. Make sure to match the corresponding connector numbers.
Remove or insert the CR cable terminal perpendicularly to the CR board connector. Pulling or
pushing the wire slantwise may damage/short/break the terminals in the connectors.
Replace and use new terminal if it is damaged.
4-91
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.11 Replacing Accessory Unit

4.11.1 Replacing Level Switch (Waste Fluid)
1. Remove the level switch (waste fluid) from connector.
No.
Part name
Level switch (waste fluid)

VJ16
Connector
2. Remove the level switch (waste fluid) from the cap of the waste fluid bottle assembly.
3. Remove the level switch (waste fluid).
Rev.-01
4-92
4 Parts Replacement
4.12 Replacing Take Up Unit

This section describes the procedure to replace the Take Up unit.
NOTE
Have two or more people to replace the part of take up unit.
4.12.1 Removing Tension Arm

1. Remove the two screws (hexagon socket pan flat head M4 8) retaining tension arm R.
No.
Part name
Tension arm R
Screw that retains the Tension

arm R (hexagon socket pan flat
head M4 8)
No.
Part name
2. Remove the tension arm L from tension fulcrum shaft.
Tension arm L
Tension fulcrum shaft
3. Remove the tension arm.

4-93
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
NOTE
If the scroller is not in an horizontal position after the installation, loosen the fixing screw for scroller
height. Loosen the screw for scroller height adjustment to adjust the horizontal balance.
3
4
5
2
3
1
No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Take up Unit
Scroller receiver
Scroller
Scroller height fixing screw
Scroller height adjustment screw
4-94
4 Parts Replacement
4.12.2 Removing Take Up Unit Fixing Plate

1. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head bolt M4 10: 4 pieces) that retain the take up unit fixing plate
on the origin side.
2
No.
Part name
Take up fixing bracket
Screw that retains the take up

unit fixing plate (hexagon socket
head bolt M4 10)
Take up unit fixing plate
2. Remove the take up unit fixing plate.

3. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head bolt M4 10: 4 pieces) that retain the adjuster attachment hook.
No.
Part name

head bolt M4 10)
4. Remove the adjuster attachment hook.

5. Remove the screws (hexagon socket head bolt M4 10: 4 pieces) that retain take up fixing plate on the
opposite of the origin side.
2
No.
Part name
Take up base L

head bolt M4 10)
6. Remove the take up unit fixing plate.
4-95
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover

NOTE
Lower the release lever to the FREE side before removing the take up unit cover.
1. Remove the screw (set screw: 1) that retains the knob.
No.
2
Part name
Knob
Screws that retain the knob (set

screw)
2. Remove the screws (pan head small screw M3 8: 2 pieces) that retain the rubber foot.
No.
Rev.-01
4-96
Part name
Rubber foot
Screws that retain the rubber

foot (pan head small screw M3
8)
4 Parts Replacement
3. Detach the lever from the release cam.
No.
Part name
Release cam
Lever
4. Remove the screws (binding head small screw M3 5: 7 pieces) that retain the take up unit cover.
2
No.
1
Part name
Take up Unit cover
Screws that retain the take up

unit cover (binding head small
screw M3 5)
5. Remove the take up unit cover.

4-97
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.12.4 Replacing Scroller

(1) Replacing Holding Roller
1. Remove the E ring (E-6) that retains the holding roller using a driver.
No.
Part name
holding roller
E ring that retains the holding

roller (E-6)
2. Remove the holding roller and the bearing.

3. Fit the E ring (E-6) to the holding axis using a long-nose pliers.
(2) Replacing Holding Roller L

1. Remove the screw that retains the holding roller L on the scroller receiver (left).
No.
2
3
2. Remove the scroller receiver (left).

Rev.-01
4-98
Part name
Holding roller L
Screws that retain the holding

roller L
Scroller receiver (left)
4 Parts Replacement
(3) Replacing Drive Collar

1. Remove the screws (round head spring screw M3 8: 2 pieces) that retain the drive collar on the take up
unit scroller (left).
No.
2
3
Part name
Drive collar
Screws that retain the drive

collar (round head spring screw
M3 8)
Take up Unit scroller (left)
2. Remove the drive collar.

4.12.5 Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly

(1) Removing Board Chassis
1. Remove the screws (round head spring screw M3 6: 4 pieces) that retain the board chassis on the chassis
(out).
No.
2
3
1
Part name
Board chassis
Screws that retain the board

chassis (round head spring
screw M3 6)
Chassis (out)
4-99
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
2. Detach the motor cable, W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
connector to the VJ take up unit CNT board assembly that appears.
No.
2
1
Rev.-01
4-100
Part name
VJ take up unit CNT board

assembly
Motor cable
W_ON sensor relay assembly,

the W_OFF sensor relay
assembly
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing VJ Take Up Unit CNT Board Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screw that retains the board chassis.
"(1) Removing Board Chassis" p.4-99
1. Remove the cable of the DC cable assembly and the VJ take up unit SW board assembly from the
connector to the VJ take up unit CNT board assembly.
No.
1

assembly
DC cable assembly
VJ take up unit SW board

assembly
Part name
2. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M3 6: 4 pieces) that retain the VJ take up unit
CNT board assembly on the board chassis.
2
No.
Part name

assembly
Screws that retain the VJ take up

unit CNT board assembly
(round head spring screw
finishing M3 6)
Board chassis
3
2
3. Remove the VJ take up unit CNT board assembly.

(3) Replacing Power Board Assembly (of take up unit section for foreign use)
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the power board assembly.
4-101
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
1. Detach the AC cable assembly and the DC cable assembly from the connector to the power board
assembly (of take up unit section for foreign use).
1
3
No.
Part name
Power board assembly (of take

up unit section for foreign use)
AC cable assembly
DC cable assembly
2. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M 4 8: 4 pieces) that retain the power supply
cover on the hexagon spacer.
No.
Part name
Power supply cover
Screws that retain the power

supply cover (round head spring
screw finishing M 4 8)
Hexagon spacer
3. Detach the hexagon spacers (4 pieces) from the power board assembly.
4. Detach the power board assembly (of take up unit section for foreign use) from the board chassis.
Rev.-01
4-102
4 Parts Replacement
(4) Replacing VJ Take Up Unit SW Board Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the VJ take up unit SW board
assembly.
1. Detach the cable of the VJ Take Up Unit SW Board Assembly from the connector to the VJ take up unit
CNT board assembly.
1
No.
Part name

assembly
Cable of the VJ take up unit SW

board assembly
2. Remove the screws (flat head small screw M3 6: 2 pieces) that retain the SW mounting plate on the
board chassis.
1
No.
1
SW mounting plate
Screws that retain the SW

mounting plate (flat head small
screw M3 6)
Board chassis
4-103
Part name
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
3. Remove the screws (pan head small screw M3 8: 4 pieces) that retain the VJ take up unit SW board
assembly on the SW mounting plate.
2
No.
4. Remove the VJ take up unit SW board assembly.

Rev.-01
4-104
Part name
VJ take up unit SW board

assembly
Screw that retains the VJ take up

unit SW board assembly (pan
head small screw M3 8)
SW mounting plate
4 Parts Replacement
(5) Replacing AC Cable Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the AC cable assembly.
1. Remove the cable of the VJ take up unit SW board assembly from the connector to the VJ take up unit
CNT board assembly.
No.
1
Part name

assembly
Cable of the VJ take up unit SW

board assembly
2. Detach the AC cable assembly from the connector to the power board assembly (of take up unit section
for foreign use).
No.
Part name

AC cable assembly
3. Replace the AC cable assembly.

4-105
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(6) Replacing DC Cable Assembly

NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the DC cable assembly.
1. Remove the screws that retain the DC cable assembly on the board chassis (round head spring screw
finishing M4 8: 2 pieces).
No.
3
Part name
DC cable assembly
Screws that retain the DC cable

assembly (round head spring
screw finishing M4 8)
Board chassis
2. Detach the DC cable assembly from the connector to the power board assembly (of take up unit section
for foreign use).
1
No.
Part name

DC cable assembly
3. Cut the KI tie that retain the DC cable assembly to replace the DC cable assembly.
4. To reassemble the unit, reverse the removal procedure. Retain the DC cable assembly using the KI tie.
Rev.-01
4-106
4 Parts Replacement
4.12.6 Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor

(1) Replacing W_ON Sensor Relay Assembly, W_OFF Sensor Relay Assembly
NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing W_ON sensor relay assembly or
W_OFF sensor relay assembly.
1. Remove the cable of the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
1
No.
Part name

assembly
Cable of W_ON sensor relay

assembly and W_OFF sensor
relay assembly
2. Detach the W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the CR_HP sensor
and the lever sensor.
1
No.
Part name
CR_HP sensor, lever sensor

W_OFF sensor relay assembly
3. Replace the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly
4-107
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
(2) Replacing CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor

NOTE
Remove the screws that retains the board chassis before replacing the CR_HP sensor or the lever
sensor.
1. Remove the cable of the W_ON sensor relay assembly and W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the
1
No.
Part name

assembly

2. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M3 6: 2 pieces) that retains the sensor mounting
plate (87NX) on the right of the inside chassis.
3
No.
Part name
Sensor mounting plate (87NX)
Screws that retains the sensor

mounting plate (87NX) (round
head spring screw finishing M3
6)
Right of the inside chassis
(Rear side)
Rev.-01
4-108
4 Parts Replacement
3. Detach the W_ON sensor relay assembly and the W_OFF sensor relay assembly from the CR_HP sensor
and lever sensor.
1
No.
Part name
CR_HP sensor, the lever sensor

4. Detach the CR_HP sensor and the lever sensor from the sensor mounting plate (87NX).
2
No.
Part name
Sensor mounting plate (87NX)
CR_HP sensor, the lever sensor
4-109
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
4.12.7 Replacing Peripheral Devices of VJ Take Up Unit Motor Assembly

(1) Replacing Drive Roller
1. Remove the flat head screws (set screw (top cup point) M4 6: 2 pieces) that retain the drive roller on
the drive axis C.
No.
Part name
Drive roller
Screws that retain the drive

roller (set screw (top cup point)
M4 6)
Drive axis C
2. Remove the drive roller.

(2) Replacing VJ Take Up Unit Motor Assembly

CAUTION
Do not touch the motor right after starting-up the plotter. Otherwise, you may be burned.
NOTE
Remove the following parts before replacing the VJ take up unit motor assembly.
Take Up Unit cover:
"4.12.3 Removing Take Up Unit Cover" p.4-96
Screw for the board chassis:
Rev.-01
4-110
4 Parts Replacement
1. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M4 10: 3 pieces) that retain the motor mounting
plate on the right of the inside chassis.
2
No.
Part name
Motor mounting plate
Screws that retain the motor

mounting plate (round head
spring screw finishing M4 10:
3 pieces)
Right of the inside chassis
2. Detach the chain from the sprocket large.

1
No.
Part name
Sprocket large
Chain
3. Remove the screws (round head spring screw finishing M4 6:2 pieces) that retain the axis holder on the
motor mounting plate.
No.
Part name
Axis holder
Screws that retains the axis

holder (round head spring screw
finishing M4 6)
4. Remove the bearings.

5. Replace the VJ take up unit motor assembly.
4-111
Rev.-01
4 Parts Replacement
Rev.-01
4-112
5.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2
Preparation .............................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine ............................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Starting Up ..................................................................................... 5-5
5.3
Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode ...................................................... 5- 6

5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode ..................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu ....................................... 5-8
5.4
Platen Adjustment Menu ...................................................................... 5- 10
5.5
Inspection Menu.................................................................................... 5- 11
5.5.1 Memory Size Menu ...................................................................... 5-12
5.5.2 Version Menu............................................................................... 5-13
5.5.3 Operation Panel Menu ................................................................. 5-14
5.5.4 Sensor Menu ............................................................................... 5-15
5.5.5 Encoder Menu ............................................................................. 5-17
5.5.6 Fan Menu..................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.7 History Menu................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.8 Head Waveform Menu ................................................................. 5-21
5.6
Ink Charging Menu................................................................................ 5- 22
5.7
Adjustment Menu.................................................................................. 5- 23
5.7.1 CR Return Position Adjustment Menu ......................................... 5-25
5.7.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu ........................................................... 5-26
5.7.3 Skew Check Menu ....................................................................... 5-28
5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu .............................................................. 5-29
5-1
Rev.-01
5.7.5 Voltage Adjustment ...................................................................... 5-33

5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High Adjustment ........................................ 5-36
5.7.7 Side Margin Adjustment Menu ..................................................... 5-42
5.7.8 Test Printing Menu ....................................................................... 5-43
5.7.9 HeadWash Menu.......................................................................... 5-44
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu............................................ 5-45
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu ............................................................... 5-46
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu ........................................................................... 5-47
5.8
Cleaning Menu .......................................................................................5- 48
5.9
Sample Printing Menu ...........................................................................5- 49

5.9.1 Adjustment pattern ALL ................................................................ 5-50
5.9.2 Parameter ALL ............................................................................. 5-50
5.9.3 Error history .................................................................................. 5-50
5.9.4 Dot pattern.................................................................................... 5-51
5.10 Time Check ............................................................................................5- 52

5.11 Parameter Menu.....................................................................................5- 52
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu ....................................................... 5-53
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu .............................................................. 5-56
5.12 Servo Setting .........................................................................................5- 64
5.13 Endurance Running Menu ....................................................................5- 67
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu.......................................................... 5-68
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu .......................................................... 5-69
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu................................................................ 5-70
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu ................................. 5-71
Rev.-01
5-2
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu............................................................ 5-72

5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu ................................................ 5-73
5.14 Media Feed Menu .................................................................................. 5- 73
5.15 ExControl Menu .................................................................................... 5- 74
5.15.1 Version......................................................................................... 5-74
5.15.2 Sensor ......................................................................................... 5-75
5.15.3 Heater .......................................................................................... 5-76
5.15.4 History.......................................................................................... 5-76
5.16 PaperInitial Menu .................................................................................. 5- 77
5-3
Rev.-01
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. It is used in the manufacturing process, adjustment,
and maintenance.
The self-diagnosis function is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
5.2 Preparation
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you must make the machine ready to call up the self-diagnosis
menu.
5.2.1
Preparations on Machine
Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, perform the following preparations.
(1) Setting Printing Media

Set a roll media for adjustment.
NOTE
In the self-diagnosis menu display status, the media type is automatically set to roll media.
During adjustment, use coated paper for the media.
(2) Connecting Power Cable

Connect the power cable to the machines inlet assembly and insert the power plug into an outlet.
NOTE
Do not connect three or more power plugs to one outlet.
Rev.-01
5-4
5.2.2
Starting Up
To use the self-diagnosis function, you must first call up the self-diagnosis menu on the operation panel.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and self-diagnosis display
mode. To call up the self-diagnosis menu, follow the steps below.
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the selfdiagnosis menu mode, press [Power] key to turn
the printer off.
2. While holding down [Setting/value -] key,
[Setting/value +] key and [>] key in the operation
panel simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The system will enter the self-diagnosis mode
and display the self-diagnosis menu.
5-5
Rev.-01
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode

This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode as well as providing the list of available
diagnosis items.
5.3.1
Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode
Follow the operation flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
TIP
For more detailed operation steps, refer to the flow chart of the applicable diagnosis item.
1. Press [<] key or [>] key in the operation panel to

select the item to be diagnosed, and press [Enter]
key.
The item is selected.
If the item has a sub menu, the sub menu is
displayed.
2. When the LCD monitor in the operation panel

indicates a setting value, the value can be
modified.
Press [Setting/value +] key or [Setting/value -]
key in the operation panel to modify the value.
3. To save the modified value, press [Enter] key in

the operation panel.
The modified set value is stored and the next item
is displayed
NOTE
If you press [Cancel] key, or, [Setting/value
+] key or [Setting/value -] key, instead of
[Enter] key, the modification is not stored.
Rev.-01
5-6
4. To quit the diagnosis, press [Cancel] key in the

operation panel.
The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
diagnosis menu.
5. To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press [Power]

key.
5-7
Rev.-01
5.3.2
Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu
The self-diagnosis menu includes the following diagnosis items.

Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
Platen Adjustment
Menu
Performs temperature setting for the pre-heater and platen

heater to 30 C.
Inspection Menu
Performs various inspections on the memory, version,

"5.5 Inspection
operation panel, sensors, encoders, fans, and head waveform. Menu" p.5-11
Also, displays the inspection records of above items.
Ink Charging Menu
Performs ink charging.
"5.6 Ink
Charging Menu"
p.5-22
Adjustment Menu
Performs various adjustments for the printer mechanism.
"5.7
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-23
Cleaning Menu
Performs cleaning of the print head.
"5.7.11 Feed
Pitch Check Menu"
p.5-46
Print Menu
Performs sample printing necessary for adjustment.
"5.9 Sample
Printing Menu" p.549
Time Check Menu
Confirming the time of the printer.
"5.10 Time
Check" p.5-52
Parameter Menu
Configures various adjustment parameters.
"5.11
Parameter Menu"
p.5-52
Servo Menu
Performs adjustment for the servo motor.
"5.12 Servo
Setting" p.5-64
Endurance Running
Menu
Performs endurance running of the printer mechanism.
"5.13
Endurance Running
Menu" p.5-67
Media feed Menu
Feeds media into the printer forward or backward.
"5.14 Media
Feed Menu" p.5-73
ExControl Menu
Diagnoses the controller board, sensors, heater check.

Also, displays the diagnosed records of above items.
"5.15 ExControl
Menu" p.5-74
PaperInitial Menu
Performs initialization and media detection setting.
"5.16
PaperInitial Menu"
p.5-77
Rev.-01
5-8
"5.4 Platen
Adjustment Menu"
p.5-10
[<] key
[Enter] key
Platen Adjustment Me
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Inspenction Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Ink Charging Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Adjustment Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Cleaning Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Print Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Time Setting Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Servo Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Endurance Running M
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Media Feed Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
ExControl Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Paper Initial Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
5-9
Rev.-01
5.4 Platen Adjustment Menu

In the platen adjustment menu, you can set the temperature of the pre-heater and platen heater to 30 C.
Parts assembly and adjustment should be done in the condition.
* This item displays platen temperature only.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Pre-heater
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
PlatenHeater 1
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
PlatenHeater 2
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Fig. 5-1 If the heater temp. does not reach 30C.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
Platen Heater 1
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Fig. 5-2 If the heater temp. reach 30C.
NOTE
If the heater temp. reach 30 C, buzzer sounds.
Rev.-01
Pre-heater
[Cancel] key
5-10
Platen Heater 2
5.5 Inspection Menu

In the inspection menu, you can perform various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors, and fans.
The inspection menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-1 Diagnosis Items for Inspection Menu
Diagnosis
item
Contents
Reference
Memory size Displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly
"5.5.1 Memory
Size Menu" p.5-12
Version
Displays the versions of the firmware and MAIN board assembly

Firmware version
Backup parameter version
Setting of dip switches
Revision of MAIN board assembly
CompanyCode setting
"5.5.2 Version
Menu" p.5-13
Operation
panel
Used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and
LED.
"5.5.3
Operation Panel
Menu" p.5-14
Sensor
Displays the status of the following sensors.

CR_ORG sensor
Wiper sensor
Cover sensor
Lever sensor
Head slide sensor
Waste fluid box sensor
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
Head transistor thermistor sensor
Head thermistor sensor
"5.5.4 Sensor
Menu" p.5-15
Encoder
Displays the detected values from the following encoders.

CR (Carriage)
PF (Media feed)
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
Fan
Used to check if the following fans operate normally by turning them

"5.5.6 Fan
ON and OFF.
Menu" p.5-17
Suction fan
Cooling fan
History
Used to check the following records. Used to initialize the serious

error history.
Maintenance history
Serious error history
"5.5.7 History
Menu" p.5-18
Head
waveform
Used to check the head-driving waveform.
"5.5.8 Head
Waveform Menu"
p.5-21
5-11
Rev.-01
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
Ram Capacity Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Version Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Panel Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[>] key
[>] key
[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Encoder Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Fan Menu
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
History Menu
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
Head Signal Menu
[Cancel] key
[>] key
5.5.1
Sensor Menu
Memory Size Menu
This menu displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN board assembly.
[Cancel] key
Test Menu
Rev.-01
5-12
5.5.2
Version Menu
This menu displays the following contents about the firmware and MAIN board assembly.
Firmware version
Setting of dip switches of MAIN board assembly
Revision of MAIN board assembly
CompanyCode setting
TIP
Settings for the DIP switch on the MAIN board assembly are displayed as follows:
ON: 0, OFF:1
Switch No. 1: LSB
Switch No. 2: MSB
[<] key
Firmware version
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Setting of DIP switches
of main board assembly
[>] key
[<] key
Revision of main board assembly
[>] key
CompanyCode setting
5-13
Rev.-01
5.5.3
Operation Panel Menu
This menu is used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and LEDs.
(1) Operation Panel Key Check

When you press a key in the operation panel, the name of the key is displayed on the LCD. To exit the
operation panel key check, press [Cancel] key twice.
(2) LCD Check

The entire LCD screen is filled in black. You can check for any missing dots.
(3) LED Check

The following LEDs light up in order. The LCD displays the name of the LED that is currently illuminated
Power lamp
Data lamp
High lamp
Low lamp
Wave lamp
Strong lamp
Normal lamp
Economy lamp
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
[Enter] key
Operation Panel Key Check
[Cancel] key (twice)

[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
5-14
LCD Check
LED Check
5.5.4
Sensor Menu
This menu displays the sensor status on the operation panel.

If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the relevant sensor
referring to the table below.
Table 5-2 Inspection Items in Sensor Menu
No.
Sensor name
Status in display
Reference
CR_HP sensor
ON / OFF
"4.5.2 Replacing CR Origin

Point Sensor" p.4-47
Waste fluid tank sensor
ON / OFF
Wiper sensor
ON / OFF
Cover sensor
Open / Close
Lever sensor
Up / Down
"4.5.3 Replacing Lever Sensor"

p.4-49
P_EDGE sensor
0 to 255
"7.12.1 P_EDGE Sensor

Sensitivity Adjustment" p.7-80
P_REAR sensor
0 to 255
"7.12.2 P_REAR Sensor

Adjustment" p.7-83
Headgap
Low / High
Head
** C
10
Transistor1, 2
** C
"4.6.1 Replacing Print Head"

p.4-56
-
NOTE
For the following sensors, the sensor sensitivity is displayed in decimal number.
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
5-15
Rev.-01
[<] key
CR_HP Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Waste Fluid Tank Sensor
Wiper Sensor
Cover Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
Lever Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
P_EDGE Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
P_REAR Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Head Gap Sensor

Head Sensor
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
H Transistor 1
H Transistor 2
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-16
5.5.5
Encoder Menu
This menu displays the detected values from the following encoders.
CR_ENC (Carriage)
PF_ENC (Media feed)
NOTE
For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in hexadecimal number.
[<] key
CR_ENC
[>] key
[<] key
PF_ENC
[>] key
5.5.6
Fan Menu
This menu is used to check if the fans operate normally by turning them ON and OFF.
If this operation is selected, the fans operate as follows:
Suction fan: Turns to ON.
Cooling fan: Turns to OFF.
If you press [Cancel] key, the suction fan is deactivated and the cooling fan is resumed, and the display shifts
to "Inspection: Fan".
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
[>] key
5-17
Rev.-01
5.5.7
History Menu
This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history.
This menu is used to check maintenance history and serious error history and to initialize serious error history.
[<] key
Maintenance history
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Serious error history
Initialization of the serious

communication
[>] key
(1) Maintenance History

This displays the past maintenance records on the following components.
Number of wiping cycle
Number of CR motor activation cycles
Number of PF motor activation cycles
Number of printed copies
Number of cleaning cycles
Discharged amount of heads (K. C. M. Y)
Pump count (number of pump wheel cycles)
Number of lock solenoid downs
NOTE
All values of maintenance history are indicated in hexadecimal form.
Rev.-01
5-18
[<] key
Frequenc[ of the wiper blade used
[>] key
[<] key
CR Motor driving (Unit : Operation count)
(Ink tube reciprocating count and the function)
[>] key
[<] key
PF Motor driving (Unit : 10m)
[>] key
[<] key
Frequenc[ of printing
[>] key
[<] key
Frequenc[ of cleaning
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Head B1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
Head B2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
Head C1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)

[>] key
[<] key
Head C2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key
[<] key
Head M1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key
[<] key
Head M2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key
[<] key
Head Y1 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key
[<] key
Head Y2 Fire (Unit: Mdots)
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
Frequenc[of the pump operation
(Pump wheel rotation count)
[<] key
Frequency of the lock solenoid moving down

[>] key
5-19
Rev.-01
(2) Serious Error History

Indicates serious error history.
NOTE
The serious error history does not include CPU error.
The serious error history menu indicates the history up to 64.
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[<] key
[>] key
[>] key
(3) Error Initialization

This menu is used to initialize the serious error history.
[Enter] key
Rev.-01
5-20
5.5.8
Head Waveform Menu
This menu is used to check the head-driving waveform.

* This function is used in factory only.
NOTE
SHOT COUNT can be selected from 1 to 655.
Magnification can be selected from the range of x1 - 100000. Nozzle can be selected among A H and ALL.
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[<] key
5-21
Rev.-01
5.6 Ink Charging Menu

In the ink charging menu, you can charge ink.
The ink charging menu includes the following items.
Table 5-3 Ink Charging menu
Charging item
Contents
InkCharge
Performs initial ink charging.
LittleCharge
Performs a small amount of ink charging.
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[>] key
* In LittleCharge process, the printer charges a small amount of ink, which is one-fourth of
InkCharge main suction steps.
Rev.-01
5-22
5.7 Adjustment Menu

In this menu, you can align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
The adjustment menu includes the following diagnosis menus.
Table 5-4 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
CR return position
adjustment
Performs confirmation of the CR return position while

printing and adjustment.
Head nozzle check
Prints out a printing to check the ink discharge

performance of the head nozzles.
"5.7.2 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-26
Skew check
Performs media feed and detects the degree of skew in

media feed by the sensor.
"5.7.3 Skew Check

Menu" p.5-28
Head slant check
Prints out a printing to check for print head slant

(horizontal and vertical direction). Mechanical
adjustment must be performed as necessary.
"5.7.4 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-29
Volt. Offset
Adjusts the print position of VSD3 - small head.
"5.7.5 Voltage
Adjustment" p.5-33
Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment Low
Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance

(Uni-D) of PG Low and the position of the repeated
printing.
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Uni-D 240B: 240cps Banner
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240B: 240cps Banner
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
Uni-D / Bi-D
adjustment High
Prints out a printing to align the nozzle line distance

(Uni-D) of PG High and the position of the repeated
printing.
Uni-D 240: 240 cps
Uni-D 320: 320 cps
Bi-D 240: 240 cps
Bi-D 320: 320 cps
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
Side margin
adjustment
Sets the side margin.
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu" p.542
Test printing
Prints out a head nozzle check pattern, an adjustment

"5.7.8 Test Printing
pattern, adjustment parameters, serious error history or a Menu" p.5-43
dot pattern.
5-23
Rev.-01
Table 5-4 Diagnosis Items in Adjustment Menu (Continued)

Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
HeadWash
Cleans the tubes and heads using cleaning liquid.
"5.7.9 HeadWash
Menu" p.5-44
Software counter
initialization
Clears various software counters.
"5.7.10 Software
Counter Initialization
Menu" p.5-45
Feed amount check
Used to check the media feed amount per band.
"5.7.11 Feed Pitch

Check Menu" p.5-46
Solid print check
Performs solid nozzle print check (color selection, nozzle

"5.7.12 Solid Print
selection and print direction selection are available).
Menu" p.5-47
[<] key
[Enter] key
CR Return Position Adjustment Menu

[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Nozzle Check Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Check Skew Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Head Slant Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Voltage Adjustment Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Adjustment Menu

[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High Adjustment Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Side Margin Adjustment Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Test Print Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Head Wash Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Software Counter Initialization Menu

[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[Cancel] key
Feed Pitch Check Menu
[>] key
[Enter] key
Solid Print Menu

[Cancel] key
Rev.-01
5-24
5.7.1
CR Return Position Adjustment Menu
In this menu, you can adjust the CR return position (near end position of the carriage) on the origin side.
CR Return: Check moves the carriage three times..
CR Return: Input adjusts the return position of the carriage.
[<] key
Confirms CR return position
[>] key
[<] key
Adjusts CR return position
[>] key
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -]

to change the setting value.
(Range: -1.0 - 1.0mm, 0.1mm increment)
5-25
Rev.-01
5.7.2
Head Nozzle Check Menu
In this menu, you can check if the head nozzles that has been charged can discharge ink correctly by printing
a sample printing. To check the head nozzle, follow the steps below.
1. Set media as necessary.
2. After media is set, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the following modes.
1 pass, unidirectional
PF: 360 dpi
CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head nozzle check patterns for the following points.
Ink nozzle discharge amount (omission, discontinuity, meandering)
Satellite
T fence
Nozzle alignment in vertical direction
Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction
Nozzle check: Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Vertical nozzle alignment check: Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Horizontal nozzle alignment check (CW direction): Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Horizontal nozzle alignment check (CCW direction): Prints the patterns in the order of A to H.
Rev.-01
5-26
4. If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of the head nozzles, perform cleaning.
TIP
"5.8 Cleaning Menu" p.5-48
5. After cleaning, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Media set
If media is not set
Finish
printing
Displays during adjustment printing
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5-27
Rev.-01
5.7.3
Skew Check Menu
Feed the paper to check the skew size using sensor.

When you select this item from the Adjustment Menu, the printer feeds the loaded media by one pass and
checks difference of the media edge positions before and after the media feed detected by the sensor.
NOTE
Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
The printer determines the media setting reference position during first detection of media left edge.
Therefore, the media that is not set correctly may cause errors as below.
Media error occurs during skew check and printer operation stops.
During media initial operation after power is turned on or media is cut, "Undefined Paper"
frequently occurs.
0.1 m increments
0.1 mVQ10m
[Enter] key
If media is not set

Media set
Finish media initialization
Media edge detection finishes normaly
Table 5-5 Skew Amount Specification

Condition
Roll media
Rev.-01
7m
Specification
2.5 mm or less
5-28
5.7.4
Head Slant Check Menu

Table 5-6 Head Slant Items
Items
Contents
Head slant: slant
Head slant check: horizontal direction
Head slant: vertical
Head slant check: vertical direction
(1) Horizontal Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the horizontal direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.
2. After media is set, the printer prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
1 pass Uni-D
PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
Head slant
A: Check the point to check the slant.
B: Media feed direction
C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
#
OO
&
5-29
'
Rev.-01
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.8 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-71
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.
Display during adjustment printing

Finish printing
[<] key

[>] key
Finishes printing
[<] key
Outputs pattern
[>] key
(2) Vertical Direction Checking

This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant in the vertical direction.
To perform head slant check, follow the steps below.
2. After media is set, the machine prints out head slant check patterns in the following modes.
1 pass Uni-D
PF: 360 dpi, CR: 360 dpi
3. Check the printed head slant check patterns. Checking items are as follows:
A: Check the point to check the vertical slant angle.
C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the right.
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the left.
Rev.-01
5-30
#
$
$
#
$
#
#
$
%%9
#
$
$
#
$
#
#
$
%9
'
&
4. If any head slant is found, perform mechanical adjustment.
TIP
"7.9 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)" p.7-73
5-31
Rev.-01
5. After mechanical adjustment, make the machine print out head nozzle check patterns again.

Finish printing
[<] key

[>] key
Finishes printing
[<] key
Outputs pattern
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-32
5.7.5
Voltage Adjustment
This menu is used to adjust the voltage of VSD 3 small dot so that the print position will be corrected.
Check the small dot is on the center of the middle dots in the CR direction.
When adjusting, change the voltage up to 5V (0.1V increment) considering the current voltage as a basis.
NOTE
The default value is set a proper one so that genuine ink works fine.
Items
Contents
240 CW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CW printing.
240 CCW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps / CCW printing.
320 CW
320 CCW
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5-33
Rev.-01
The following figure shows a case for 240 CW.
[Enter] key
If media is not set
Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)

If the temperature of the pre-heater and
platen heater is below 42 C
* Pressing [Cancel] key stops control and start printing
Finish warm-up

Finish printing
Press [Setting/Value+] or [Setting/Value-] key
to change unit to pulse
Volt range: -5V to 5V (0.1V)
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4

VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
Print pattern: 240 CW

2B 2A
1B
1A 2B
2A 1B
1A
CW
240CPS
B
C
Rev.-01
5-34
A: Print direction
B: Adjust the voltage so that the small dot printed positions (shown as dot-line) are the same with the
middle dot printed positions (in the CR direction).
C: Executed adjustment item is printed like this.
Items
Speed
240 CW
CW 240 CPS
320 CW
CW 320 CPS
240 CCW
CCW 240 CPS
320 CCW
CCW 320 CPS
* Print pattern: Uni-D, 2-pass, 1A to 2B print

1st pass: prints middle dot
2nd pass: prints small dot
5-35
Rev.-01
5.7.6
Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High Adjustment
Adjusts the gap of the print heads (in the CR moving direction) when the head is in the PG Low or High and
the print position of the head in repeatability printing.
To adjust, perform printing in repeatability printing and correct CW and CCW printing positions by inputting
parameters.
*Check the print patterns of origin, center, and opposite side to adjust the gap equally.
Adjustment items are shown below.
Table 5-7 Uni-D / Bi-D menu items
Item
Contents
Uni-D 240
Adjusts CW at 240 CPS. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320
Adjusts CW at 320 CPS. PG Low or High
Uni-D 240B
Adjusts CW at 240 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Uni-D 320B
Adjusts CW at 210 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240
Adjusts Bi-D at 240 CPS. PG Low or High
Bi-D 320
Adjusts Bi-D at 320 CPS. PG Low or High
Bi-D 240B
Adjusts Bi-D at 240 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High
Bi-D 320B
Adjusts Bi-D at 320 CPS-Banner. PG Low or High

Table 5-8 Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment items
Item
Contents
Set up
Sets the selected parameter.
Print
(Print2 if Bi-D is
selected)
Prints pattern according to the selected item with the

current parameter.
Print1
(Displayed only when
Bi-D is selected.)
Prints pattern according to the selected item with the

current parameter, plus with the values of 2 / 4 / 6 / 8
to the current parameter.
Check the gap of those printed patterns.
The actual procedure is as follows.

2. After that, printer starts printing automatically.
Rev.-01
5-36
3. Check the printed pattern of CW adjustment.

The following shows a case for Uni-D Low 240B Print.
Prints the pattern in the order of 1A to 4B.
Uni-Lo
240CPS
-+
-+
4B 4A
-+
-+
-+
3B
3A 2B
-+
-+
2A 1B
-+
1A
B
A: Media feed direction
B: Adjust the setting value so that these point matches.
Uni-D 240: Uni- Lo/Hi 240 CPS
Uni-D 320: Uni- Lo/Hi 320 CPS
Uni-D 240B: Uni- Lo/Hi 240 CPS Banner
Uni-D 320B: Uni- Lo/Hi 320 CPS Banner
* Either Lo or Hi is displayed at where explained as Lo/Hi above.
The following shows a case for Bi-D Low 240B Print1
Prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Bi-Lo
240CPS
-+
-+
-+
-+
-+
-+
-8
-6
-4
-2
2A +2
-+
-+
-+
+4
+6
+8
C
B
5-37
Rev.-01

Bi-D 240: Bi- Lo/Hi 240 CPS
Bi-D 240B: Bi- Lo/Hi 240 CPS Banner
The following shows a case for Bi-D Low 240B Print2
Prints the pattern by using 2A nozzle.
* Both Uni-D / Bi-D High should be adjusted in the same procedure.
Bi-Lo
240CPS
-+
-+
4B 4A
-+
-+
-+
3B
3A 2B
-+
-+
2A 1B
-+
1A

Rev.-01
5-38
Check the print patterns of origin, center, and opposite side to adjust the gap equally.
If any abnormal conditions are found, identify the gap of the print positions and enter it as the CW
adjustment parameter.
After that, print test pattern again as necessary.
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240)
or Adj 7: Uni/Bi High

[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key (When selecting Bi-D 240)

[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5-39
Rev.-01
(1) A case for Print1 or Print2 is selected.

* The sample image is in common with Bi-D and Uni-D.
Select Print2 when adjusting Print 2
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to Low)
If the temperature of the preheater and platen
heater is below 42 C

Finish Printing
Back to Uni-D/Bi-D Top menu
(2) A case for Set up (Uni-D 240) is selected.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key

to change the setting value.
1 pulse = 1/720 inch
Pulse range: -100 VQ 100
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-40
If Bi-D is selected, the parameter input process is as shown below.

(The following shows a case for Bi-D 240 - Setup is selected.)

1 pulse = 1/2880 inch
Pulse range: -400 VQ400
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Back to UniD/Bi-D Top menu

[>] key
NOTE
The default value is set a proper one so that genuine ink works fine.
5-41
Rev.-01
5.7.7
Side Margin Adjustment Menu
This menu is used to adjust the printing margins.

To adjust the margins, follow the steps below.
2. The printer detects the media size and the size is displayed on the operation panel.
3. The printer prints out band feed correction adjustment patterns and cuts the media in the following modes.
Black, 1 pass, unidirectional, 360 dpi
* The pattern is printed with magenta if Confirm is selected.
4. Check the printed side margin adjustment patterns for the measurement.
2
1
TOP
1: Side margin
2: Media feed direction
5. Enter each measured value as the parameter.
(Input range: 0.0 to 6.0 mm (0.1 mm increments))
Press [Cancel] key to go back

to Adj8: SideMarginMenu
Press [Setting/value+] or [Setting/value-] key
to select initialize or check
After pressing [Enter]key
After printing
Side Margin: 0.1 increments
Rev.-01
5-42
5.7.8
Test Printing Menu
In this menu, you can print out adjustment patterns for checking various adjustment items.
2. After media is set, the machine prints out the following test printings.
Nozzle check: Prints head nozzle check patterns.
Nozzle check steps: Prints head nozzle check patterns of lines only.
Adjustment parameters: Prints setting values for each adjustment item.
Error history: Evaluates the serious error history.
3. Press the [Enter] key in the operation panel to start the selected test printing.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Printing adjustment pattern
[Enter] key
[>] key
5-43
Rev.-01
5.7.9
HeadWash Menu
This menu is used to purge ink and clean the heads at the end of the manufacturing process and before print
head replacement.
1. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to determine the Head Cleaning Menu.
2. Remove all ink cartridges.
3. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to discharge ink.
4. After ink is discharged, install the head cleaning jig.
5. Press [Enter] key in the operation panel to charge shipping liquid.
6. After shipping liquid is charged, remove the head cleaning jig.
Remove all cartridges and press [Enter] key to discharge ink
Finish Ink Discharge

Set cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to charge shipping liquid
After shipping liquid is charged
Remove cleaning jig and press [Enter] key to discharge

shipping liquid
Rev.-01
5-44
5.7.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize the software counters such as the waste ink counter.
NOTE
The counters are initialized before delivery. Do not initialize them during maintenance.
The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.
Table 5-9 Software Counters to be Initialized
Counter
Initial
value
Waste ink amount counter
Ink consumption counter K
Ink consumption counter C
Ink consumption counter M
Ink consumption counter Y
Cumulative print timer
User Ink-filling flag
Not filled
Smartchip log
None
Ink Not-filled flag
Not filled
Pressing the [Enter] key in the operation panel performs the software counter initialization.
Pressing [Cancel] key cancels the initialization.
Adjustment Menu
[Enter] key
Finish initialization
5-45
Rev.-01
5.7.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu

In this menu, you can check the media feed amount for one band by reviewing a sample printing.There is no
adjustment items.
To check the feed pitch, follow the steps below.
2. Select Adj: Send Pitch.
3. Select the feed pitch.
Pattern 1: Prints at intervals of 360 (720) dpi. This resolution causes no gaps.
Pattern 2: Prints at intervals of 1440 dpi. This causes a gap in one line out of four lines.
4. Pattern 1 is printed as shown below.
Media feed amount

for one band
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Rev.-01
[Enter] key
Finish Printing or [Cancel] key
5-46
5.7.12 Solid Print Menu

This menu is used to print solid print patterns with head on both ends.
Print pattern
5mm
B
Specified color nozzles of both series A and B
Nozzles for series B only

Nozzles for series A only
20mm
5mm

B: 100% printing
[<] key
Press [Setting/value +] or [Setting/value -] key
to select color to check
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
to select nozzle to eject ink
[>] key
[>] key
[<] key
ALL: All nozzles
ODD: Odd numbered nozzles
EVEN: Even numbered nozzles
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
to select color to check
[>] key
[<] key
CW: Eject ink when CW scanning
CCW: Eject ink when CCW scanning
[>] key
5-47
Rev.-01
5.8 Cleaning Menu

In this menu, you can clean ink from the print heads.
The cleaning menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 5-10 Diagnosis Items in Cleaning Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Economy
Performs economy cleaning.
Normal
Performs normal cleaning.
Powerful
Performs powerful cleaning.
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] key
Economy Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
Normal Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Strong Cleaning
[Cancel] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-48
5.9 Sample Printing Menu

This menu prints out a sample printing.
The sample printing menu includes the following items.
Table 5-11 Diagnosis Items in Sample Printing Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Adjustment pattern ALL
Prints adjustment pattern.
Parameter ALL
Prints out the set values of various adjustment items.
Error history
Prints serious error history.
Dot pattern
Prints dot diameter check pattern.
NOTE
If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the number before you
can start the adjustment variable printing.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Adjust Pattern printing
Adjust Parameter printing
Error record printing
Dot diameter printing
[>] key
5-49
Rev.-01
5.9.1
Adjustment pattern ALL
Confirms printing and prints adjustment pattern.
If media is not set

Media set
If head gap is PG-Low
Change head gap (to PG-Low)
[>]key
[Cancel]
Finish warm-up

Finish printing
If head gap is PG-High
Change head gap (to PG-High)
Finish warm-up
5.9.2

Parameter ALL
Prints out the set values of various firmware adjustment parameters.
After pressing [Enter]key
5.9.3
Error history
Prints serious error history and smartchip log.
Rev.-01
5-50
5.9.4
Dot pattern
Prints dot diameter check pattern
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Warming up starts after

parameters set
Finish warm-up
5-51
Rev.-01
5.10 Time Check

Confirms the date and time controlled by RTC (Real Time Clock) on the MAIN board assembly.
NOTE
You cannot set the date and time using this menu. In that case, use the time setting function of
MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant.
"7.3.8 Date & Time Setting" p.7-29
[Enter] key
Press [Enter] or [Cancel] key to go back
to Time Check Menu
5.11 Parameter Menu

In this menu, you can modify the set values of various adjustment items (adjustment parameters).
The parameter menu includes the following items.
Table 5-12 Diagnosis Items in Parameter Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
Initialization
Initializes the adjustment parameters.
"5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-53
Update
Updates the adjustment parameters.
"5.11.2 Parameter
Update Menu" p.5-56
[<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Initialization Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Parameter Update Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-52
5.11.1 Parameter Initialization Menu

This menu initializes the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be initialized through this menu are
as follows.
Uni-D / Bi-D parameter, wiper, CR motor, PF motor, pump, waste ink
Initialization of all items
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
[>] key
5-53
Rev.-01
(1) Voltage Offset

This menu updates the voltage offset parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-13 Voltage offset item
Items
Contents
240 CW
240 CCW
320 CW
320 CCW
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-54
(2) Uni-D / Bi-D Low

This menu updates the Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameter.
or Update 3: Uni/Bi High
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5-55
Rev.-01
5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu

This menu updates the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updated through this menu are as
follows.
NOTE
The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash memory unless the system power is turned
OFF.
CR return position
Head rank
Voltage offset
Uni-D / Bi-D Low
Uni-D / Bi-D High
Side margin
Not-filled flag
Serial number
Debug Bit
[<] key
[Enter] key
CR Return Position Update Menu

[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Head Parameter Update Menu

Head Voltage Offset Menu
[>] key
Uni-D/Bi-D Low Update Menu

[>] key
Uni-D/Bi-D High Update Menu

[>] key
Side Margin Update Menu

[>] key
Ink Parameter Update Menu

[>] key
Serial No.Update Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Debug Bit Update Menu

[Cancel] key
Rev.-01
5-56
(1) Head Rank

This menu updates the head rank parameters. The head rank is used to determine the print head driving
voltage and correct the head temperature.
After head rank is entered, the system shifts to the Ink Charge Menu.
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
Error will occur if input value is wrong.

[Cancel]
key
Press [Enter] key to retry

Initial Ink charge will not executed.
Head ID will be updated.
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
[Enter] key
5-57
Rev.-01
(2) Voltage Offset

This menu updates the voltage offset parameter (VSD3 small dot).
Table 5-14 Voltage offset item
Items
Contents
240 CW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps. CW printing.
240 CCW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 240 cps. CCW printing.
320 CW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 320 cps. CW printing.
320 CCW
Adjusts the VSD 3-S at 320 cps. CCW printing.
[<] key
[>] keys
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
When it is 240 CW
VH3L-1 to VH3L-4
VH3S-1 to VH3S-4
Rev.-01
5-58
(3) Uni-D / Bi-D Low and High

This menu updates the Uni-D / Bi-D adjustment parameter.
or Update 4: Uni/Bi High
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5-59
Rev.-01
(The following shows a case for Uni-D 240 is selected.)
If any parameter has been changed

[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
*Change the value by pressing [+] or [-] key

-100 to 100
[>] key
[<] key
* 2A is not displayed because it is a basis.
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
*It will be #2 when High Menu

It will be 320 when 320 Menu
It will be 240B when 240B Menu
It will be 320B when 320B Menu
[>] key
This menu updates the printing position alignment parameters.

(The figure shown below is a case for Bi-D 240)

[Enter]
key
[Enter] key
Change the value by [setting/balue+]

or [setting/value-]key
-400 to 400
*It will be #2 when PG High
Rev.-01
5-60
(4) Side Margin

This updates the side margin parameters.
When any parameter has been changed

[Enter]
key
[Enter] key
(5) Ink Not-filled Flag

This updates the ink parameter. The setting items are as follows.
User/: Charge; Cleaned, Ink not charged
User/Init:Not Charge; Not Cleaned, Ink not charged
User/Init:Charge; Cleaned, Ink charged
Change the value by pressing [+] or [-] key

User/ :
Charge
User/Init: Not Charge
User/Init:
Charge
[Enter] key
When any parameter has been changed

[Enter] key
NOTE
When selecting "Reset", be sure to install the cartridge.
5-61
Rev.-01
(6) Serial Number Entry

This is for entering the serial number.
Enter Serial Number (digit by digit)

[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
NOTE
The fourth digit of the serial number indicates either of the followings:
A: United States
E: Europe
J: Japan
Rev.-01
5-62
(7) Debug Bit update

Updates the debug bit. This is a trial function for firmware.
TIP
Debug bit is displayed as a binary number. The factory-setting value and default value are as
follows.
Factory-setting value: 000000
Default value: 000000
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
[>]key
[<]key
[>]key
[<]key
[>]key
[<]key
[>]key
[<]key
[>]key
[<]key
[>]key
[<]key
[>]key
[<]key
Input value (digit by digit)

Change the setting value by pressing
[+] or [-]key

[Enter]
NOTE
This function is not used in maintenance work.
5-63
Rev.-01
5.12 Servo Setting

Changes the servo setting.
* Do not change the parameters. This menu is basically for checking printer trouble (noise or vibration) and
print quality.
Table 5-15 Servo setting item
Items
Contents
240 cps CW
Servo setting at CR CW direction, 240 cps
240 cps CCW
Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 240 cps
320 cps CW
Servo setting at CR CW direction, 320 cps
320 cps CCW
Servo setting at CR CCW direction, 320 cps

Table 5-16 Servo adjustment item
Items
Rev.-01
Contents
Proportional gain
Sets proportional gain/
Integral gain
Sets integral gain
Low-pass filter
Sets low-pass filter
PWM scale
Sets PWM scale
Sets C
5-64
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key When selecting 240cps CW
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
='PVGT?MG[
Change the value (unit to count) by pressing

[+] or [-] key
The maximum / minimum / count value for each item is shown blow.
Items
Max.
Min.
Count
GP
0 2000
0 7800
0 200
GI
0 800
255
GLPF
PWM
10
15
30
60
5-65
Rev.-01
The initial set value for each item is shown below.

If the speed is same, the initial value for CW and for CCW will be the same.
Table 5-17 Initial value for Servo setting
Items
Rev.-01
Initial value
at 240 cps
at 320cps
GP
0 5400
0 4e00
GI
0 40
0 30
GLPF
228
219
PWM
13
13
45
45
5-66
5.13 Endurance Running Menu

Performs endurance running of mechanicals and the head.
The endurance running menu includes the following items.
Table 5-18 Diagnosis Items in Endurance Running Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Reference
CR motor
Performs carriage stroke.
"5.13.1 CR Motor
Endurance Menu" p.568
PF motor
Drives the PF motor.
"5.13.2 PF Motor
Pump
Drives the pump motor assembly.
"5.13.3 Pump
Nozzle print
Performs sequential print operation of the print head.
"5.13.4 Print Head

Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-71
General endurance
Performs endurance running on the CR and PF

concurrently.
"5.13.5 General
Confirmation
Confirms the number of endurance running cycles.
"5.13.6 Endurance
Running Check Menu"
p.5-73
[<] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
CR Motor Endurance Menu

[>] key
PF Motor Endurance Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Pump Motor Endurance Menu

[Cancel] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
[Cancel] key
[Enter] key
Sequential Printing Endurance Menu

[>] key
General Endurance Menu

[>] key
Endurance Running Check Menu

[>] key
[Cancel] key
[<] key
5-67
Rev.-01
5.13.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the CR motor.
You can operate the carriage stroke according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-19 Set Items in CR Motor Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Running speed (CW,

CCW)
Set the carriage running speed

(CW direction, CCW direction)
100, 120, 160, 200,

240, 320, 400
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance

running cycles
-1 to 10000
Remark
Unit: cps
CAUTION
When the CR motor endurance running is performed, note the following;

Install available ink cartridges.
If the CR motor endurance running is performed without ink cartridges, ink inside the tube
may leak through the ink holder during the carriage movement.
TIP
If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats endurance
running until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
The carriage moving distance is fixed to the maximum value of print area.
CW-speed
[Enter] key
CCW-speed
[Enter] key
Endurance Count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance
[Enter] or [Cancel] key
Rev.-01
5-68
5.13.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the PF motor.
You can drive the PF motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-20 Set Items in PF Motor Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Media feed amount
Set the media feed amount 0.1 to 100

per endurance running
cycle
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of

endurance running cycles
Remark
Unit: mm
-1 to 10000
TIP
The following table shows the motor moving parameters to media feed amount.
Speed
35CPS
Acceleration
0.1G
Deceleration
0.1G
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If the
number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
Media feed amount

[Enter] key
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance
5-69
Rev.-01
5.13.3 Pump Endurance Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the pump motor assembly.
You can drive the pump motor assembly according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.
Table 5-21 Set Items in Pump Motor Assembly Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Running speed
Set the running speed of

pump motor assembly.
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance -1 to 10000

running cycles
Remark
Super High / High /

Normal
TIP
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit number). If
the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
[Enter]
key
[>] key
Endurance Count
Performing Endurance
[Enter] key
[Enter] or [Cancel ] key
Rev.-01
5-70
The pump endurance running sequence is as follows.

1. Pump endurance running starts.
2. Pump phase detection is performed.
3. Rotates with the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
Step 2 above is repeated the number of times specified as follows.
Super High 4000
High 3000
Normal 2000
Low 1000
4. Pump release is performed.
5. Pump endurance running ends.
5.13.4 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu

This menu performs endurance running for the plot head.
You can operate the plot head according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-22 Set Items in Sequential Plotting Endurance Menu
Set item
Number of endurance
running cycles
Contents
Set value
Remark
Set the number of

-1 to 10000
TIP
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance running
5-71
Rev.-01
5.13.5 General Endurance Menu

This menu performs the general endurance running.
You can operate various driving systems according to your desired settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Table 5-23 Set Items in General Endurance Menu
Set item
Contents
Set value
Remark
Running speed (CW,

CCW)
Set the carriage running

speed (CW direction,
CCW direction)
100, 120, 160, 200, 240m Unit: cps

320, 400
Media feed amount
Set the media feed

amount per cycle
0.1 to 100
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of

-1 to 10000
Unit: mm
TIP
In the general endurance menu, the following operations are performed as one cycle of endurance
running
Carriage stroking: 1 stroke
Media feed: 1 cycle
If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the carriage continuously repeats stroking
until cancel input is given from the operation panel.
CW-speed
[Enter] key
CCW-speed
[Enter] key
Media feed amount
[Enter] key
Endurance count
[Enter] key
Performing endurance running
Rev.-01
5-72
5.13.6 Endurance Running Check Menu

In this menu, you can confirm the number of endurance running cycles that have been already finished.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even if a serious error
occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of finished cycles just before the occurrence
of the serious error.
[<] key
Number of endurance running cycles
for the CR Motor
[>] key
[<] key
for the PF Motor
[>] key
[<] key
for the Pump motor
[>] key
[<] key
for Sequential Printing
[>] key
[<] key
Number of general endurance running cycles
[>] key
5.14 Media Feed Menu

In this menu, you can feed media into the printer frontward or backward.
The mechanical initialization should be done if it is not performed yet.
5-73
Rev.-01
5.15 ExControl Menu

In this menu, you can diagnose the equipment on the controller board.
Table 5-24 Controller Board Check Item
Items
Contents
Remark
Version
Firmware, board revision
Sensors
Pre-heater thermistor, platen heater thermistor 1 and 2,

after-heater thermistor, ink ID for each cartridges, ink
NOT sensor for each cartridge, ink END sensor for each
ink.
Heater
Pre-heater, platen heater, after-heater
History
Maintenance history confirmation
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
5.15.1 Version
In this menu, you can check the ROM version of the controller board firmware, and the version of the
controller board. The firmware version (AP version) is displayed as XX.XX. The controller board version
is displayed in hex format (2 digit).
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-74
5.15.2 Sensor
The status of the following sensors on the controller board is displayed.
Pre-heater thermistor sensor
Platen heater thermistor sensor 1 and 2
After-thermistor sensor
Ink ID for each ink sensor
Ink NOT sensor for each ink cartridge
Ink END sensor for each ink
[<] key
Pre-heater condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Platen Heater1 condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Platen Heater2 condition display
[>] key
[<] key
After Dryer heater condition display
[>] key
[<] key
K Ink ID condition display
[>] key
[<] key
C Ink ID condition display
[>] key
[<] key
M Ink ID condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Y Ink ID condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Ink NOT sensor condition display
[>] key
[<] key
Ink END sensor condition display
[>] key
5-75
Rev.-01
5.15.3 Heater
In this menu, you can check whether pre-heater, platen heater, and after-heater works properly or not. The
printer sets the temperature at 50C and controls the selected heater process. Press [Cancel] key to stop the
operation.
If the temperature reaches to the set value, the printer keeps the temperature control.
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[Enter] keyWhen selecting Pre
5.15.4 History
You can check the maintenance history of the controller board control device. The history is displayed in H
(hour) / M (min.) / S (sec.).
Total operating time of each heater shows the period from when the printer is used in self-diagnosis mode.
Daily operating time is not counted.
[<] key
Time of using Pre-heater
[>] key
[<] key
Time of using Platen Heater
[>] key
[<] key
Time of using After Dryer Heater
[>] key
Rev.-01
5-76
5.16 PaperInitial Menu

In this menu, you can set the media detection method in the self-diagnosis mode. The default value is the same
as the one in the normal operation mode.
Select either Top & Width / Width / Off. When Off is selected, you can set the media width in the media width
setting menu.
Table 5-25 Media Detection Item
Items
Contents
Top & Width
Normal media detection mode
Width
Detects media width.
Off
Does not detects media.

s
[-] key
Press the [+] or [-] key

to change the selection.
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
[-] key
[+] key
When set OFF
5-77
Set the paper width by pressing

[+] or [-] key.
Setting range: 210 - 1225 mm
Rev.-01
Rev.-01
5-78
6.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2
Operations in Maintenance Mode 2....................................................... 6- 2

6.2.1 Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2 ............................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2..................................................... 6-3
6.3
Maintenance Menu.................................................................................. 6- 3
6.3.1 Counter Display Menu ................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu ............................................................ 6-6
6.3.3 Counter Print Menu........................................................................ 6-8
6.3.4 Media Feed Menu .......................................................................... 6-8
6-1
Rev.-01
6.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode2.
The maintenance mode2 provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life counters. It is
used in the manufacturing process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The maintenance mode2 is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.
TIP
"2.3 Part Names and Functions" p.2-3
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2

This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode2 as well as provides the list of
available diagnosis items.
6.2.1
Starting Up the Maintenance Mode 2
To use the maintenance mode 2, you must first call up the maintenance menu on the operation panel.
The maintenance menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and setup menu display
mode. To run the maintenance menu, follow the steps below.
1. If the system is in the operation mode or the setup
menu mode, press the [Power] key to turn the
power off.
2. While holding down [>] key, [Setting/Value-]
key and [<] key in the operation panel
simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The maintenance mode will start running and
display the maintenance menu.
Rev.-01
6-2
6.2.2
Operating Maintenance Mode 2
"5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode" p.5-6
6.3 Maintenance Menu

The maintenance menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Table 6-1 Diagnosis Items in Maintenance Menu
Diagnosis item
Counter: Indication
Contents
Reference
Displays the life counter
"6.3.1 Counter Display

Menu" p.6-4
Counter: Init Counter Initializes the life counter
"6.3.2 Counter
Initialization Menu" p.6-6
Counter: Print
Prints the life counter values
"6.3.3 Counter Print

Menu" p.6-8
PaperFeed
Feeds media into the printer frontward or backward
"6.3.4 Media Feed

Menu" p.6-8
[<] key
[Enter] key
Counter display
[>] key
[Cancal] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Counter initialization
[>] key
[Cancal] key
[<] key
[Enter] key
Counter print
[>] key
[Cancal] key
[Enter] key
[<] key
Media feed
[Cancal] key
[>] key
6-3
Rev.-01
6.3.1
Counter Display Menu
This menu displays the life counters. It consists of the following diagnosis items.
NOTE
All life counters are displayed in decimal number.
Table 6-2 Diagnosis Items in Counter Display Menu

Diagnosis item
Contents
Used Ink K
Displays the ink consumption (K) counter.
Used Ink C
Displays the ink consumption (C) counter.
Used Ink M
Displays the ink consumption (M) counter.
Used Ink Y
Displays the ink consumption (Y) counter.
Print Number
Displays the total number of printed copies.
Waste Ink
Displays the waste ink amount counter.
CR Motor
Displays the life counter of the CR motor.
PF Motor
Displays the life counter of the PF motor.
PUMP
Displays the life counter of the pump unit.
HEAD K1, K2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (K).
HEAD C1, C2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (C).
HEAD M1, M2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (M).
HEAD Y1, Y2
Displays the life counter of the head nozzle (Y).
Cleaner
Displays the life counter of the cleaning unit.
Rev.-01
6-4
[<] key
Ink consumption (K) counter
[>] key
[<] key
Ink consumption (C) counter
[>] key
[<] key
Ink consumption (M) counter
[>] key
[<] key
Ink consumption (Y) counter
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Total number of printed copies
Life counter of the CR motor

Life counter of the PF motor
Life counter of the pump unit
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
Life counter of the head nozzle (K1)

Life counter of the head nozzle (K2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (C1)
Life counter of the head nozzle (C2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (Y1)

Life counter of the head nozzle (Y2)
Life counter of the head nozzle (M1)
Life counter of the head nozzle (M2)
Life counter of the cleaner head

[>] key
6-5
Rev.-01
6.3.2
Counter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the life counters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as follows.
Table 6-3 Diagnosis Items in Counter Initialization Menu
Diagnosis item
Contents
Print Num.
Initializes the total print counter.
Ink
Initializes the ink amount counter.
All
Initializes the life counter.
NVRAM
Initializes the NVRAM.
Timer
Initializes the timer.
CR Motor
Initializes the CR motor life counter.
PF Motor
Initializes the PF motor life counter.
Head Unit
Initializes the head nozzle life counter.
Cleaning
Initializes the life counter of the cleaning unit.
PUMP
Initializes the life counter of the pump unit.
Shipping
Batch initializing before shipping

(Print Num., CR Motor, PF Motor, Cleaning, Pump)
Rev.-01
6-6
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[>] key
[<] key
[Enter]
key
[>] key
6-7
Rev.-01
6.3.3
Counter Print Menu
This menu prints the life counter values.
[Enter] key
After media is set
6.3.4
Media Feed Menu
This menu feeds media into the printer frontward or backward.

The mechanical initialization should be performed, if it is not performed yet.
Rev.-01
6-8
7 Adjustment
Adjustment
7.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2
Adjustment Item...................................................................................... 7- 3
7.3
Working with MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant..................... 7- 8

7.3.1 Parameter Backup ....................................................................... 7-10
7.3.2 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-10
7.3.3 Required Environment ................................................................. 7-11
7.3.4 Receiving Parameters.................................................................. 7-17
7.3.5 Firmware Installation.................................................................... 7-19
7.3.6 Sending Parameters .................................................................... 7-26
7.3.7 Sub Controller Installation............................................................ 7-27
7.3.8 Date & Time Setting..................................................................... 7-29
7.4
Working with MUTOH Service Assistance ......................................... 7- 30

7.4.1 Parameter Backup ....................................................................... 7-30
7.4.2 Jigs and Tools.............................................................................. 7-30
7.4.3 Required Environment ................................................................. 7-31
7.4.4 Date & Time Setting..................................................................... 7-40
7.4.5 Editing Media Type ...................................................................... 7-41
7.4.6 Downloading and Saving Error Log ............................................. 7-43
7.4.7 Updating Main Firmware.............................................................. 7-47
7.4.8 Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller ................................ 7-48
7.4.9 Receiving Parameters.................................................................. 7-49
7.4.10 Sending Parameters .................................................................... 7-51
7.4.11 Using Diagnostic Mode ................................................................ 7-54
7-1
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.4.12 Downloading Individual Code ....................................................... 7-58

7.4.13 Uploading Authorization Code...................................................... 7-59
7.4.14 Referring Setup List Information................................................... 7-61
7.4.15 Referring Adjust Parameters ........................................................ 7-63
7.4.16 Version Information ...................................................................... 7-65
7.4.17 Quitting Application....................................................................... 7-66
7.5
PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment ..................................7- 67

7.5.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-67
7.5.2 Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 7-67
7.6
PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment.......................................7- 68

7.7
CR Belt Tension Adjustment ................................................................7- 70
7.8
Head Alignment (Horizontal Height) ....................................................7- 71
7.9
Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) ...........................................................7- 73
7.10 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment.........................................................7- 75

7.10.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-75
7.11 PG Height Adjustment ..........................................................................7- 78
7.11.1 Jigs and Tools .............................................................................. 7-78
7.12 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment .................................................7- 79
7.12.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ...................................... 7-80
7.12.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment........................................................ 7-83
Rev.-01
7-2
7 Adjustment
7.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on necessary adjustment items and procedures.
TIP
7.2 Adjustment Item

This section describes the adjustment items required in part replacement procedures.
When you adjust or replace any of the maintenance parts listed in Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List, you must
always adjust the printout quality using the self-diagnosis function referring to Table 7-1Adjustment Item
List (p.7-3).
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List
Part replaced or
adjusted
Printer head
Adjustment
order
Adjustment item
Reference
Head rank input (including initial ink

charge)
"(1) Head Rank"

p.5-57
"5.6 Ink Charging
Menu" p.5-22
Head nozzle check
"5.7.2 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-26
Head slant check (horizontal)
"5.7.4 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-29
Head slant check (vertical)
"5.7.4 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-29
Head slant adjustment (horizontal)
"7.8 Head
Alignment (Horizontal
Height)" p.7-71
Head slant adjustment (vertical)
"7.9 Head
Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-73
Uni-D / Bi-D Low Adjustment

Uni-D / Bi-D High Adjustment
"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
Printing Menu" p.5-43
Reset of head unit life counter
"5.11.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu"
p.5-53
7-3
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
Table 7-1 Adjustment Item List (Continued)

Part replaced or
adjusted
Main board
assembly
CR motor assembly
Rev.-01
Adjustment
order
Adjustment item
Reference
Parameter backup
"7.3.1 Parameter
Backup" p.7-10
Firmware installation
"7.3.5 Firmware
Installation" p.7-19
Voltage input (no need for initial ink

charge)
"(1) Head Rank"

p.5-57
Head nozzle check
"5.7.2 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-26

"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
Side margin adjustment
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
P_REAR sensor position adjustment
"7.12.2 P_REAR
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-83
Media sensor sensitivity adjustment
"7.12 Media
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-79
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
CR belt tension adjustment
"7.7 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-70

"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
7-4
7 Adjustment

Part replaced or
adjusted
Adjustment
order
PF motor assembly
PF speed reduction belt tension

adjustment
"7.5 PF Speed
Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-67
PF encoder assemblyy position

adjustment
"7.6 PF Encoder
Assembly Position
Adjustment" p.7-68
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
"7.12.2 P_REAR
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-83
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
"7.12 Media
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-79
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
"7.12 Media
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-79
"7.12.2 P_REAR
Sensor Adjustment"
p.7-83
Cover sensor
assembly
Cover sensor assembly mounting

position adjustment
"7.8 Head
Height)" p.7-71
PF_ENC assembly
PF_ENC assembly mounting position

adjustment
"7.12 Media
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-79
PF_ENC inspection
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
P_EDGE sensor
assembly
P_REAR sensor
assembly
Adjustment item
7-5
Reference
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment

Part replaced or
adjusted
T fence
Adjustment
order
Adjustment item
Reference
CR encoder inspection
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17

"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
CR driven pulley
"7.7 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-70
Cutter holder
assembly
Cutter holder assembly mounting

position adjustment
"7.10 Cutter
Holder Height
Adjustment" p.7-75
P_EDGE sensor adjustment
"7.12.1 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-80
Print margin adjustment
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
"7.7 CR Belt
Tension Adjustment"
p.7-70
CR encoder inspection
"5.5.5 Encoder
Menu" p.5-17
Cutter holder assembly mounting

position adjustment
"7.10 Cutter
Holder Height
Adjustment" p.7-75
P_EDGE sensor adjustment
"7.12.1 P_EDGE
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment" p.7-80
Sequential printing endurance operation

"5.13.4 Print Head
check
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-71
Carriage assembly
Rev.-01
7-6
7 Adjustment

Part replaced or
adjusted
Adjustment
order
Adjustment item
Carriage assembly
(Continued)
Head rank input
"(1) Head Rank"

p.5-57
"5.13.4 Print Head
Endurance (Nozzle
Print) Menu" p.5-71
Print margin adjustment
"5.7.7 Side Margin

Adjustment Menu"
p.5-42
Head nozzle check
"5.7.2 Head Nozzle

Check Menu" p.5-26
Head slant check (horizontal)
"5.7.4 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-29
10
Head slant check (vertical)
"5.7.4 Head Slant

Check Menu" p.5-29
11
Head slant adjustment (horizontal)
"7.8 Head
Height)" p.7-71
12
Head slant adjustment (vertical)
"7.9 Head
Alignment (Vertical
Slant)" p.7-73
13

"5.7.6 Uni-D / Bi-D

Low and High
Adjustment" p.5-36
14
Test printing
"5.7.8 Test
7-7
Reference
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.3 Working with MUTOH Maintenance Engineer

Assistant
In this section, the operation of MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant is explained below.
On this printer, you can export and import the parameter settings, as well as installation of the firmware via
network by using dedicated software.
NOTE
For backing up/installing parameters or installing firmware, you can use either of the following
software. Follow the procedure corresponding to the software you will use.
Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant: The explanation is described below. The existing printers
has been set up using this software.
Mutoh Service Assistance: Newly built software. Some of the specification has been added and
revised.
"7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance" p.7-30
CAUTION
Do not provide MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant to the customer because the
software can upload the printer parameter to computer.
In case of main board replacement, work in the following order.

1. Setting up working environment:
"7.3.3 Required Environment" p.7-11
2. Receiving parameters:
"7.3.4 Receiving Parameters" p.7-17
3. Replacing main board:
4. Setting DIP SW:

5. Transferring firmware to printer:
"(2) Transferring Firmware" p.7-22
6. Confirming completion of installation to printer:

Printer" p.7-24
7. Sending parameters:
"(3) Confirming Completion of Installation to
"7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-26
NOTE
You can skip operations 2, 3, 4, and 7 above if you upgrade the firmware version only.
Rev.-01
7-8
7 Adjustment
Workflow for Firmware installation after MAIN board replacement
Confirm IP Adress of Printer
Set IP Address of PC
Operation for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer

Assistant
Operation for operation panel
Maintenance work
Execute Board Manager mode
Parameter settings
accessible?
NO
YES
Save parameters
Replace MAIN board
Set DIP SW position to ON
Select default IP address
Install Firmware
Confirm Firmware installation
NO
Parameters of old board

is saved?
YES
Initialize NV RAM
Send parameters to printer
Turn off printer
Input parameters manually
Set DIP SW position to OFF
End
7-9
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
Workflow for Firmware installation (Version-up Procedure)
Confirm IP Adress of Printer
Operation using MUTOH Maintenance

Engineer Assistant
Operation using operation panel
Set IP Address of PC
Execute Board Manager mode
Install Firmware
Confirm Firmware installation
End
7.3.1
Parameter Backup
The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) installed on the main board assembly stores various parameters for the system
operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
. Panel setting parameters
. Mechanism adjustment parameters
. Main board-unique adjustment parameters
TIP
The main board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the main board assembly is found to need replacement during maintenance operations, make sure to back
up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original system status, omitting some
adjustment steps.
7.3.2
Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant operation.
Windows PC:
CPU: Pentium 400MHz or higher, Installed memory: 128MB or more
With one of the following installed: Windows98/Windows98SE/WindowsMe/Windows2000/
WindowsXP
Rev.-01
7-10
7 Adjustment
Equipped with network port (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet interface)

With dedicated network software (MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant) installed
Network crossover cable (For hub connection, network straight cable)
7.3.3
Required Environment
Before starting work, set up the following environment.
(1) Installing MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant

1. Place the CD-ROM on the CD Drive tray of computer and explore the data from My Computer.
2. Find MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant folder in the CD-ROM, drag and drop it to the desktop.
(2) Creating Shortcut icon

Create shortcut icon on the desktop to launch the MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant easily.
1. Open the MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant folder.
2. In the folder, right-click the MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant.exe, then click
[Send To] - [Desktop (create shortcut)].
3. An shortcut icon of MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant appears on the desktop.
(3) Confirming MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant launch

1. Double click the shortcut icon of MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant on the desktop
and confirm that the software is launched.
When the software is launched first, the UI
language will be Japanese.
7-11
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(4) Setting Language

You can select either Japanese or English for menu and message display.
If it is changed, the setting will be available by re-launch the software.
Follow the steps below to change the setting.
1. Select desired language from [Setup (S)] [Language (L)] of main screen.
2. In the Language Check window, click OK

The software quits automatically.
(5) Confirming IP Address of the Printer

1. Launch Mutoh Maintenance Engineer
Assistant from the shortcut on the desk top.
2. Click [Setup (S)] on the main screen.
Rev.-01
7-12
7 Adjustment
3. From [Setup (S)] menu, select [Option] and

check if the displayed address matches the
printer IP address. The default printer IP address
is 192.168.1.253. Then, click [OK].
CAUTION
For the IP address, use the default value as much as possible. If you want to use other
IP address, consult with the network administrator of the network to be connected.
Do not make the IP address in three digits on purpose by entering 0 to 1 digit or 2 digits
strings. For example, the strings which should be entered is 10, you don t have to enter
010. It may be a cause of communication error.
(6) PC IP Address Setting

To set up on Windows XP with the default IP address on the printer, follow the steps below.
1. From [Control Panel], open [Network Connections].
7-13
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and select [Properties].

3. Double-click [Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)].
4. In [IP address], input

any value of
192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.252 or
092.168.1.254.
Any numerical value between 1 and 252,
or 254.
5. Click [OK] to finish the setting.
Rev.-01
7-14
7 Adjustment
CAUTION
When the printer and PC are not directly connected with crossover cable but connected via
hub, the IP address needs to be different from that of devices on the network to be
connected. To connect via hub, consult with the network administrator.
(7) Connecting Printer to PC

1. Connect a ethernet cable to the network ports of
the printer and PC.
Network port
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use a crossover cable. When
connecting the printer and PC via hub, use a straight cable.
Use the printer and host PC on a one-to-one basis using crossover cable, not a part of network, as
possible.
7-15
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(8) Starting Board Manager Mode

1. When the printer is in the operation status or in
the menu display status, press [Power] key to
turn the printer off.
2. While holding down [<] key in the operation
panel, press [Power] key.
The LCD displays [Board Manager Mode]. If [<]
key is released, the display turns to Waiting for
command.
NOTE
If waiting for command is not displayed, follow the steps below.
If IP address that is not default is displayed on the board, releasing [Back] key will display
[IP192.168.xxx.xxx] (depending on the set address) on the LCD. In this case, display either of the
default IP (IP 192.168.1.253) or the set IP address using [+] and [-] key, and press [Enter] key.
Then, waiting for command will be displayed.
Rev.-01
7-16
7.3.4
7 Adjustment
Receiving Parameters
This section describes the procedure to record backup parameters to the PC from the existing MAIN board
assembly. To record backup parameters, follow the steps below.
NOTE
The extension of parameter file is *.prm
.
1. Click [Parameter Receive].
2. In the Parameter receive check window, click

[OK]. Installation will start.
* Click [Cancel] to return to the main window.
3. While receiving parameters, Transferring

window appears.
* Click [Cancel] to abort transferring.
4. In the Receive completed window, click [OK].

Save of receive parameter file window opens.
7-17
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
5. In the Save of receive parameter file window,

confirm the location to save and click [Save] to
determine it.
Backup parameter is saved.
NOTE
In the Save of receive parameter file window, the file name to be saved is specified automatically
(you can change the file name). The specified name will be the serial number of the printer.If the
printer has no serial number, default file name will be displayed.
Rev.-01
7-18
7.3.5
7 Adjustment
Firmware Installation
This section describes the procedure to install the firmware.

The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) on the MAIN board assembly stores the programs (firmware) that control the
machine operations.
When performing the following maintenance works, always install the firmware.
Replacing the MAIN board assembly
Updating the firmware

CAUTION
Be careful not to install wrong version of firmware. Installing wrong firmware may disable
printer startup. In this case, MAIN board replacement is required.
NOTE
The extension of firmware file is *.jfl
.
(1) Setting DIP SW on MAIN board assembly

After replacement of MAIN board assembly, you have to set DIP SW position to disable overwrite-proof
function to install the firmware.
Follow the steps below to set the DIP SW position.
CAUTION
After replacement of MAIN board assembly, make sure DIP SW position is set so that
overwrite-proof function is enabled. Otherwise, when wrong firmware is installed, it may
disable printer startup. In this case, MAIN board replacement is required.
1. Replace MAIN board assembly.

NOTE
Make sure that Paper guide R2 is attached after replacement of MAIN board assembly.
7-19
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. Slide DIP SW 2 (SW3) to left (origin side).
No.
-5&

%
10
Item
MAIN board
DIP SW
DIP SW 1
DIP SW 2
3. Turn the printer on with Board Manager Mode.

"(7) Connecting Printer to PC" p.7-15
4. Select default IP address 192.168.1.253 using
[+] and [-] key on the control panel, and press
[Enter] key
5. Install firmware referring "(2) Transferring Firmware" p.7-22 and "(3) Confirming Completion of
Installation to Printer" p.7-24.
6. Send parameters referring "7.3.6 Sending Parameters" p.7-26.
Rev.-01
7-20
7 Adjustment
NOTE
If there is no backup parameter is saved for some reason, such as parameter backup malfunction
because MAIN board is damaged, etc., install the latest firmware, initialize NVRAM, then set
parameters manually.
"6.3.2 Counter Initialization Menu" p.6-6
"5.11.2 Parameter Update Menu" p.5-56
7. Turn the printer off.

8. Slide DIP SW 2 (SW3) to right (opposite of origin side).
NOTE
10
%
-5&
After installation, make sure to set DIP SW position to the right (opposite of origin side) as shown
below.
9. Attach covers.
7-21
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(2) Transferring Firmware

The following explains the procedure to transfer firmware.
Follow the steps below.
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use crossover cable. When connecting
the printer and PC via hub, use straight cable.
1. Click [Firmware Install].
2. Select a file to be transferred from the folder

where the firmware is saved, and click [Open].
The Select of installation file window is
displayed.
3. In the Firm installation check window, click

[OK] to start installation.
4. Transferring window is displayed.

Rev.-01
7-22
7 Adjustment
5. If the Transfer completed window opens, click

[OK] to close the window.
CAUTION
After the Transfer completed window is displayed, only the transfer of installation file
from MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant to the printer is completed, not program
installation to the printer. Do not turn off the printer until installation to the printer finishes.
When Transfer failed incompatible F/W message is displayed while installation of proper
firmware, see the section below:
"(1) Setting DIP SW on MAIN board assembly" p.7-19
7-23
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(3) Confirming Completion of Installation to Printer

Firmware installation to printer continues even after the Transfer completed window is closed. Check
whether the program is properly installed from the operation panel.
1. When firmware transfer starts by MUTOH
Maintenance Engineer Assistant, the LCD
display on the printers operation control panel
changes to [Program receiving].
The Data LED flashes.
2. The LCD display changes as follows:

Erasing ( is numeric)
Copying ( is numeric)
Comparing ( is numeric)
CAUTION
While the LCD display is in the Erasing to Comparing status, the power key is disabled. In
this situation, never disconnect the plug of the printer. Doing so may disable printer startup,
which will require MAIN board replacement.
Rev.-01
7-24
7 Adjustment
3. If the LCD displays [transfer complete], the

buzzer sounds three times and only the Power
LED turns on among all LEDs.
4. When [ bytes recv ( is numeric)] is

displayed, installation completes.
Turn off the printer and restart it. Then check the
version number displayed on the LCD.
NOTE
If an error occurs during installation, the buzzer sounds at intervals of 0.25 second, while the LCD
displays error message and all Hight, Low, Wave, Fine & S.Fine flash. In this case, follow the
troubleshooting instructions. To stop the buzzer, press any key except for the power key once.
Pressing the key once again will return the LCD display to waiting for command and only the
Power LED on.
7-25
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.3.6
Sending Parameters
NOTE
Before sending parameters, perform the following work.
Receiving parameters:
Firmware installation:
"7.3.5 Firmware Installation" p.7-19
NOTE
The extension of parameter file is *.prm
.
1. Click [Parameter Send] on the main window.
2. When the Select of send parameter file

window opens, select the parameter file to be
transferred and click [Open].
3. In the Parameter Send check window, click

[OK] to start sending.
Rev.-01
7-26
7 Adjustment
4. When sending completes and the Send

completed window opens, click [OK].
NOTE
Almost as soon as the Send completed window is displayed, parameter writing to printer also
finishes. If writing to printer finishes successfully, the LCD displays the following:
Transfer complete
Buzzer sounds three times and only Power LED turns on. Then, when the LCD displays
16372 bytes recv
parameter writing completes.
7.3.7
Sub Controller Installation
This section describes installation procedures of HEATER CONT board firmware.
NOTE
The extension of subcontroller file is *.mfl
CAUTION
Be careful not to transfer wrong version of firmware. Installing wrong firmware may disable
printer startup. In this case, MAIN board replacement is required.
1. Click [Sub Controller Install] on the main

window.
7-27
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. When the Select of Install File window opens,

select the file to be transferred and click [Open].
3. In the Sub Controller Install check window,

click [OK] to start sending.
4. While receiving parameters, Transferring

window appears.
5. When sending completes and the Send

completed window opens, click [OK].
Rev.-01
7-28
7.3.8
7 Adjustment
Date & Time Setting
Sets date and time of the printer.

These data has been transferred from PC to printer. The setting can be confirmed in the Time setting of the
self-diagnosis function.
"5.10 Time Check" p.5-52
NOTE
The date and time information of PC is transferred directly. Check whether the information is correct
or not.
1. Click [Date & Time Install] on the main window.
2. When the Date & time installation check

window opens, click [OK].
Transferring will start.
3. When transferring completes and the Install

completed window opens, confirm that the
installed date is correct, and click [OK].
7-29
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance

In this section, the operation of MUTOH Service Assistance is explained below.
The software is also called MSA.
On this printer, you can export and import the parameter settings, as well as installation of the firmware via
network by using dedicated software.
NOTE
For backing up/installing parameters or installing firmware, you can use either of the following
software. Follow the procedure corresponding to the software you will use.
Mutoh Maintenance Engineer Assistant: The explanation is described below. The existing printers
has been set up using this software.
Mutoh Service Assistance: Newly built software. Some of the specification has been added and
revised.
CAUTION
Do not provide MUTOH Service Assistance to the customer because the software can
access the functions concerning security data of the printer.
7.4.1
Parameter Backup
The NVRAM (Flash-Rom) installed on the main board assembly stores various parameters for the system
operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
. Panel setting parameters
. Mechanism adjustment parameters
. Main board-unique adjustment parameters
TIP
The main board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the main board assembly is found to need replacement during maintenance operations, make sure to back
up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original system status, omitting some
adjustment steps.
7.4.2
Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for Mutoh Service Assistance operation.
Windows PC:
Rev.-01
7-30
7 Adjustment
CPU: Pentium 400MHz or higher, Installed memory: 128MB or more

With one of the following installed: Windows98/Windows98SE/WindowsMe/Windows2000/
WindowsXP
Equipped with network port (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet interface)
With dedicated network software (MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant) installed
Network crossover cable (For hub connection, network straight cable)
7.4.3
Required Environment
Before starting work, set up the following environment.
(1) Installing MUTOH Service Assistance

1. Place the CD-ROM on the CD Drive tray of computer and explore the data from My Computer.
2. Find MUTOH Service Assistance folder in the CD-ROM, drag and drop it to the desktop.
(2) Creating Shortcut icon

Create shortcut icon on the desktop to launch the MUTOH Service Assistant easily.
1. Open the MUTOH Service Assistanbe folder.
2. In the folder, right-click the MUTOH Service
Assistance.exe, then click [Send To] - [Desktop
(create shortcut)].
3. An shortcut icon of MUTOH Service Assistance appears on the desktop.
(3) Confirming MUTOH Service Assistance launch

1. Double click the shortcut icon of MUTOH
Service Assistance on the desktop and confirm
that the software is launched.
When the software is launched first, the UI
language will be English.
7-31
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(4) Setting Language

You can select either Japanese or English for menu and message display.
If it is changed, the setting will be available by re-launch the software.
Follow the steps below to change the setting.
1. Select desired language from [Setup (S)] [Language (L)] of main screen.
2. In the Language Check window, click [OK]

The software quits automatically.
(5) PC IP Address Setting

To set up on Windows XP with the default IP address on the printer, follow the steps below.
1. From [Control Panel], open [Network Connections].
Rev.-01
7-32
7 Adjustment
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and select [Properties].

3. Double-click [Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)].
4. In [IP address], input any value of

"192.168.1.1" to 192.168.1.252" or
"192.168.1.254".
Any numerical value between 1 and 252,

or 254.
5. Click [OK] to finish the setting.

CAUTION
When the printer and PC are not directly connected with crossover cable but connected via
hub, the IP address needs to be different from that of devices on the network to be
connected. To connect via hub, consult with the network administrator.
7-33
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(6) Changing to Technician Mode

Mutoh Service Assistance starts up with User mode (henceforth, MSA for User). When performing
maintenance work, change the mode to Technician mode (henceforth, MSA for Technician).
CAUTION
Do not provide the information about changing to Technician mode.

Only maintenance person is permitted to access the mode.
1. In the main menu of User mode, click [Help] [Version].

[Version] window is displayed.
2. Double-click the string part of MUTOH

Service Assistance and MSA icon
A log in window is displayed.

3. Enter the required strings In the Login and Pass
word filed and click [Login] button.
The main menu changes and MSA for
technician is displayed on the title bar.

4. Close the [Version] window.
CAUTION
Login name and Password are not disclosed in this manual. Contact a MUTOH dealer for
the information.
Rev.-01
7-34
7 Adjustment
NOTE
When MSA for User starts up in English UI mode, the MSA for Technician mode is also
displayed in English. You need to log off and log in after changing the language mode by selecting
[Setting (S)] - [Language (L)] in Technician mode.
(7) Connecting Printer to PC

1. Connect a ethernet cable to the network ports of
the printer and PC.
Network port
NOTE
When connecting the printer and PC on a one-to-one basis, use a crossover cable. When
connecting the printer and PC via hub, use a straight cable.
Use the printer and host PC on a one-to-one basis using crossover cable, not a part of network, as
possible.
7-35
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(8) Starting the Printer

You have to start the printer in a mode (described later) depending on the function you will use. The function
and the corresponding start mode is listed below.
NOTE
If the start mode is not appropriate, an error message will be displayed. In that case, select an
appropriate mode and restart the printer.
Table 7-2 MSA functions and start mode of the printer

MSA functions
Printer start mode
"7.4.4 Date & Time Setting" p.7-40
Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
"7.4.5 Editing Media Type" p.7-41
Start the printer with Printer mode.
"7.4.6 Downloading and Saving Error Start the printer with any mode
Log" p.7-43
"7.4.7 Updating Main Firmware" p.7- Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
47
"7.4.8 Updating the Firmware of
Heater Controller" p.7-48
Start the printer with any mode
"7.4.10 Sending Parameters" p.7-51
"7.4.11 Using Diagnostic Mode" p.7-54 Start the printer with Printer mode.
"7.4.12 Downloading Individual Code" Start the printer with Board Manager mode.
p.7-58
"7.4.13 Uploading Authorization
Code" p.7-59
"7.4.14 Referring Setup List

Information" p.7-61
Start the printer with Printer mode.
"7.4.15 Referring Adjust Parameters" Start the printer with Printer mode.
p.7-63
(8-a)Printer mode
Starts the printer with Printer mode.
Printer mode indicates the status that the printer is powered on normally by pressing the [Power] key on the
operation panel.
Rev.-01
7-36
7 Adjustment
(8-b)Starting Board Manager Mode

Starts the printer with Board Manager mode.
Follow the steps below to start the printer with mode.
1. When the printer is in the operation status or in
the menu display status, press [Power] key to
turn the printer off.
2. While holding down [<] key in the operation
panel, press [Power] key.
The LCD displays [Board Manager Mode]. If [<]
key is released, the display turns to Waiting for
command.
NOTE
If waiting for command is not displayed, follow the steps below.
If IP address that is not default is displayed on the board, releasing [Back] key will display
[IP192.168.xxx.xxx] (depending on the set address) on the LCD. In this case, display either of the
default IP (IP 192.168.1.253) or the set IP address using [+] and [-] key, and press [Enter] key.
Then, waiting for command will be displayed.
7-37
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(9) Confirming Printer IP Address

You can confirm the IP address of the printer either with Printer mode and Board Manager mode. Follow the
steps below to confirm the IP address.
(9-a)Confirming Printer IP Address with Printer Mode

1. Start the printer with Printer mode.
2. Press the [Enter] key on the operation panel.
3. After Menu 1: Settings > is displayed on the LCD panel, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
can be confirmed by pressing the buttons explained below.
[>] key
[Setting/value +] key
[Setting/value -] key
[Enter]
Displays IP address
[Cancel]
[Enter]
Displays Subnet mask
[Cancel]
[Enter]
Displays Default gateway
[Cancel]
NOTE
If Set 23: IP Address or other item is not displayed, change the settings so that IP address or other
items can be displayed by selecting Menu 5: Basic Selection.
Operation Manual
Rev.-01
7-38
7 Adjustment
(9-b)Confirming Printer IP Address with Board Manager Mode

1. Start the printer with Printer mode.
2. Confirm that only the Power lamp is on, press
other than [Power] key.
LCD display changes as shown right and IP

address or subnet mask can be confirmed.
* key
* key
* key
* key: Any key other than [Power] key.
NOTE
The LCD display changes as shown right
if the network interface card cannot be
recognized because of the damage or poor
contacting.
* key
* key
* key: Any key other than [Power] key.
(10)Selecting Printer Model and Confirming the IP Address

1. Double-click the shortcut icon (on the desktop)
to start Mutoh Service Assistance.exe
2. Change the mode to MSA for Technician.

"(6) Changing to Technician Mode" p.7-34
3. On the main menu, select [Settings (S)] [Options (O)].
7-39
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
4. When selecting a printer model, select the one

from the combo box.
By selecting a printer model, the corresponding
functions will be activated.
5. Confirm that the displayed IP address matches

the one of the printer. The default IP address is
192.168.1.253. After the confirmation, click
the [OK] button.
If the address is different from the default value,
change it to 192.168.1.253 and click the [OK]
button.
CAUTION
Use the default IP address if there is no problem on using the printer. If you want to
use Other than the default value, consult the network administrator of the network.
Do not add 0 when setting an IP address of 1 or 2 digit to IP address field to make the
value 3 digit. Foe example, if you want to enter 010 instead of 10, the network device
of the printer will not recognize 010 as 10 so that the communication error will occur.
7.4.4
Date & Time Setting
Sets date and time of the printer.

These data has been transferred from PC to printer. The setting can be confirmed in the Time setting of the
"5.10 Time Check" p.5-52
Rev.-01
7-40
7 Adjustment
NOTE
The date and time information of PC is transferred directly. Check whether the information is
correct or not.
Confirm that the printer is started with Board Manager mode.
"(8-b) Starting Board Manager Mode" p.7-37
1. On the main menu of MSA for Technician, click

[Date & Time Update].
2. When the "Date & time update" window opens,

click [OK].
Transferring will start.
3. While transferring, Communication situation

window is displayed.
4. When transferring completes and the Install

completed window opens, confirm that the
installed date is correct, and click [OK].
7.4.5
Editing Media Type
In this section, how to edit media type is described below.
NOTE
Before editing, make sure that the printer is started with Printer mode.
"(8-a) Printer mode" p.7-36
7-41
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
1. On the main menu of MSA for Technician,

click [Media Type Edit].
2. On the Media Type Edit window, click

[Download].
Click [Cancel] to return to the main window.
3. On the Media type download window, click

[OK].
4. After media type data is downloaded, the Media

type download window opens.
Click [OK] and return to Media Type Edit
window.
Rev.-01
7-42
7 Adjustment
5. Media type editing is finished, click [Upload].

6. On the Media type upload window, click [OK].
The media type list will be updated.
7. On the Media type upload window, confirm

the message that the upload is finished and click
[OK].
The window returns to Media type edit
window.
7.4.6
Downloading and Saving Error Log
In this section, how to download and save the error log by using MSA for Technician is described.
NOTE
Downloading and saving error log can be done either in Printer mode and Board Manager mode.
7-43
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment

[Error Log Download].
2. On the Error log download window, click

[Download Log].
NOTE
You can download the log data by selecting [Operation (O)] - [Download (D)] in the Error log
download screen.
3. On the Confirmation of error log download

window, click [OK].
4. While downloading, Communication situation

Rev.-01
7-44
7 Adjustment
5. The download is finished, the result is displayed

on the Error log download window.
If the printer has no log data, <No data> is
displayed on the window.

[Save as].
NOTE
Saving log data can be done by selecting [File] - [Save as...] in the on the Error log download
window.
7. On the Save As window, enter a file name and

click [Save].
The file extension will be *.hst.
7-45
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
NOTE
When referring error log, follow the steps below.
[Open]
Alternatively, select [File] - [Open].
2. Click a log file (*.hst) you want to refer and click

[Open].

3. In the Error log download window, the

imported data in the above step is displayed.
Rev.-01
7-46
7.4.7
7 Adjustment
Updating Main Firmware
Updates main firmware using MSA for Technician.
NOTE
Before the operation, make sure that the printer is started with Board Manager mode.
"(8) Starting Board Manager Mode" p.7-16

[Main F/W Update].
2. Click and select an installation file (*.jfl) you

want to transfer, then click [Open].

3. On the Main F/W update window, click [OK].
4. While transferring main firmware data,

Communication situation window is
displayed.
7-47
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
5. On the Transfer completed window, click

CAUTION
After the Transfer completed window is displayed, only the transfer of installation file from
MSA for Technician to the printer is completed, not program installation to the printer. Do
not turn off the printer until installation to the printer finishes.
A buzzer on the MAIN board assembly sounds three times when the program installation
finishes.
7.4.8
Updating the Firmware of Heater Controller
In this section, how to update the firmware of heater controller by using MSA for Technician.
NOTE

[Heater Controller F/W Update].
2. Click and select an installation file (*.mfl) you

want to transfer, then click [Open].

Rev.-01
7-48
7 Adjustment
3. On the Heater controller F/W update window,

click [OK].
4. While transferring the firmware data,

Communication situation window is
displayed.
5. On the Transfer completed window, click

7.4.9
Receiving Parameters
How to backup the printer parameter and download the main board inheritance information is described.
NOTE
Downloading and saving of backup parameters and main board inheritance information can be done
either in Printer mode and Board Manager mode.

[Parameter Download].
2. On the Parameter download window, click

[Yes] to start downloading the main board
inheritance information.
Click [No] to start downloading the backup
parameters.
7-49
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
NOTE
If a communication error occurs after clicking [Yes] or [No], an error message will by displayed. On
the error message window, click [OK] to return to main window.
(1) Downloading Backup Parameters

[No]. The communication dialog window is
displayed.
* Click [Cancel] to cancel the downloading the
parameter file.
2. On the "Parameter download" window, click
[OK].
3. In the Save the download parameter save

window, enter a file name and click [Save]. The
file extension (*.prm) is automatically attached.
Click [Cancel] to return to the previous window
(2) Downloading Main Board Inheritance Information

Main board inheritance information is consisted of authentication information and backup parameters.
When replacing a main board, download and save the main board inheritance information and install it to the
new board.
In this section, how to download the main board inheritance information from the main board for replacement
by using MSA for Technician.
[Yes]. The progress dialog window is
displayed.
Rev.-01
7-50
7 Adjustment

[OK].
3. On the Save the download parameter save

window, the file will be automatically named
after the printer serial number.
Choose the directory to save the file and click
[Save].
* You can name the file as you like. Click
[Cancel] to return to the main window without
saving the file.
7.4.10 Sending Parameters

How to upload the printer backup parameter and main board inheritance information by using MSA for
Technician is explained below.
NOTE

[Parameter Upload].
7-51
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. On the Parameter upload window, click [Yes]

to start uploading the main board inheritance
information.
Click [No] to start uploading the backup
parameters.
(1) Uploading Backup Parameters

1. On the Parameter upload window, click [No].
The communication dialog window is
displayed
Click and select the file to upload, and click

[Open].
* Click [Cancel] to return to the main window
without uploading.
2. On the Parameter upload window, click [OK].
NOTE
3. While transferring, the Communication

situation window is displayed.
without uploading.
Rev.-01
7-52
7 Adjustment
(2) Uploading Main Board Inheritance Information

1. On the Parameter upload window, click [Yes].
Save the download parameter save window is
displayed.
Click and select the file to upload, and click

[Open].
(You cannot select any file with the extension
other than *.bii.)
without uploading.
NOTE
If you select a file with extension other than *.bii and click [Open], an error message will be displayed
and returns to the main window.

without uploading.
NOTE
3. While transferring, "Communication situation"

4. After the data uploading is finished, the

Parameter upload window is displayed.
Click [OK] to return to the main window.
7-53
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.4.11 Using Diagnostic Mode

How to use the Diagnostic mode of MSA for Technician is explained below.
Each function has a independent monitor window (henceforth, remote panel window). You can monitor the
printer status viewing multi windows.
NOTE
Before the operation, make sure that the printer is started with Printer mode.
1. Click [Diagnostic Mode] on the MSA for

Technician main window.
2. Click a function name you want to monitor on the

Remote panel window.
NOTE
Remote panel window always monitors the printer status. Therefore, if a communication error has
occurred, an error message will be displayed.
Rev.-01
7-54
7 Adjustment
(1) Ink System

Click [Ink system] on the Remote panel window to monitor the ink status of connected printer.

No.
Description
Indicates ink colors.
Displays subtank sensor status.

Green: Sensor is ON
Red: Sensor is OFF
Displays two-way valve status.

Open: Two-way valve is open.
Close: Two-way valve is close.
Displays cartridge status.

Green: Cartridge(s) is attached.
Red: Cartridge(s) is not attached.
Displays that ink is almost end.

Green: Normal
Red: Almost end
Displays head temperature. (C = Celsius, F = Fahrenheit)
Stops monitoring.
NOTE
If a sensor has a problem and cannot monitor the printer status, the item is displayed in gray. Also, if
the printer does not have the function, the item is displayed in gray.
7-55
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(2) Smart Chip Information

Click [Smart chip information] on the Remote panel window to monitor the ink cartridge status of
connected printer.
No.

Description
Displays following cartridge information.

Format check
Format
Color
Cartridge type
Ink kind
Capacity (ml)
Consume (ml)
Company code
Serial No.
Insert count
Empty flag
No information is displayed if no cartridge is inserted.
Stops monitoring.
Indicates any other color cartridge than specified is inserted

to the slot.
(3) Heater System

Click [Heater system] on the Remote panel window to monitor the heater status of connected printer.
Rev.-01
7-56
7 Adjustment

No.
Description
Displays the information of following functions concerning

pre-heater, platen heater, and after heater (top to bottom)
Print temperature
Wait temperature
Wait time over setting
Thermistor 1 - 4
* Each value is displayed in both C (Celsius) and F
(Fahrenheit). AD is reference information for developers.
Turns to green when thermistor temperature reaches the set

value.
Stops monitoring.
Turns to green when temperature reaches set value and

starts printing.
NOTE
If the temperature sensor has a problem and cannot display the monitored information, thermistor
temperature information displays 20 C (68 F), which is the default value.
7-57
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.4.12 Downloading Individual Code

How to download individual code of printer using MSA for Technician is explained below.
Individual code is used for authorization code issue from the dealer of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
NOTE
1. Click [Individual Code Download] on the main

window of MSA for Technician.
2. Click [OK] on the Individual code download

window to download individual code of the
printer.
without downloading.
NOTE
3. While downloading individual code, progress

dialog is displayed.
4. After downloading the code, Individual code

download window will be displayed.
Rev.-01
7-58
7 Adjustment
5. On the Save the individual code window,

specify a directory or a folder to save the file, and
click [Save]. (The file extension (*.ink) will
automatically attached.)

without saving.
NOTE
The individual code saved above is used for authorization code issue.
Send the individual code file to a dealer of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD to obtain an authorization
code file.
7.4.13 Uploading Authorization Code

How to upload an authorization code file from PC to printer using MSA for Technician is explained below.
Send the individual code file to a dealer of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD to obtain an authorization code file.
NOTE
Before the operation, make sure that;
Save the authorization code file (*.ulk) to a folder before uploading the file to the printer.
Printer is started with Board Manager mode
1. Click [Authorization Code Upload] on the main

window of MSA for Technician.
7-59
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. Browse to the folder where a authorization code

file is saved, select the file and click [Open].
NOTE
If you select an inappropriate file and click [Open], an error message will be displayed and returns to
the main window.
3. On the Authorization code upload window,

click [OK] to upload the authorization code file.
without uploading.
4. While transferring the file, progress window will

be displayed.
5. After uploading the file, Authorization code

upload window is displayed.Click [OK] to
return to the main window.
Rev.-01
7-60
7 Adjustment
7.4.14 Referring Setup List Information

How to refer the information of printers setup list using MSA for Technician is explained below.
NOTE
(1) Referring Setup List Information from Printer

1. Click [Setup List] tab, then click [receive] button
on the MSA for Technician main window.

2. While transferring the information, a progress

dialog will be displayed.
3. Transferred setup list information is displayed on

the [Setup List] tab.
Click [Save] to save the information in text
format.
* The contents of the information is the same as
the one from Sample printing- Parameter
ALL.
7-61
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(2) Referring Setup List Information from Backup Parameters (*.prm)

1. On the [Setup List] tab of MSA for Technician,
click [Open].

2. On the displayed window, click a backup

parameter file, then click [Open].

3. Transferred setup list information is displayed on

the [Setup List] tab.
format.
the one from Sample printing. However, date
or firmware version is not displayed.
NOTE
The backup parameter file on the window can be referred after changing the window tab. Also,
obtaining other parameter or opening a saved parameter file updates the contents.
Rev.-01
7-62
7 Adjustment
7.4.15 Referring Adjust Parameters

(1) Referring Adjust Parameters from Printer
NOTE
1. On the [Adjust Parameters] tab of MSA for

Technician, click [receive].

2. While transferring the information, a progress

dialog will be displayed.
3. Transferred adjust parameters information is

displayed on the [Adjust Parameters] tab.
format.
the one from Sample printing.
7-63
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
(2) Referring Adjust Parameters from Backup Parameters (*.prm)

1. On the [Adjust Parameters] tab of MSA for
Technician, click [Open].
2. On the displayed window, click a backup

parameter file, then click [Open].

NOTE
If you select an inappropriate file, such as the file extension is other than *.prm, and click [Open],
an error message will be displayed and returns to the main window.
3. Transferred adjust parameters information is

displayed on the [Adjust Parameters] tab.
format.


the one from Sample printing. However, date
or firmware version is not displayed.
Rev.-01
7-64
7 Adjustment
NOTE
The backup parameter file on the window can be referred after changing the window tab. Also,
obtaining other parameter or opening a saved parameter file updates the contents.
7.4.16 Version Information

How to confirm the version of the MSA is explained below.
1. On the main window, select [Help (H)] [Version (V)].
2. After confirming the software version on the

Version window, click [OK] to return to the
main window.
7-65
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.4.17 Quitting Application

How to quit the application is explained below.
1. On the main window of MSA for Technician,
click [Exit] or [x] on the upper right of the screen
to quit the application.
* The values set in [Setup (S)] - [Option (O)] is
saved and loaded when printer starts up next
time.
NOTE
Once you quit the MSA, it starts with User mode next time. If you want to start it up with Technician
mode, you must do login operation once more.
Rev.-01
7-66
7 Adjustment
7.5 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the PF speed reduction belt.
When you have removed and installed the PF speed reduction belt, such as for PF motor removal, always
adjust the PF speed reduction belt tension.
Using PF belt tension adjustment jig, adjust the PF encoder position and the PF belt tension.
7.5.1
Jigs and Tools
The jigs and tools required for PF speed reduction belt tension adjustment are as follows.
Tension gauge: for measuring Max. 50N (5,000gf)
TIP
7.5.2
Adjustment Procedure
To adjust the PF speed reduction belt tension, follow the steps below.
1. Hook the tip of the tension gauge to the PF motor shaft.

No.

Part name
PF bracket
PF motor shaft
PF motor fixing screws
2. Tighten the PF motor fixing screws. At that time, pull the PF motor shaft in the direction shown above
with a bigger arrow so that tension gauge indicates 40.0 0.5N (4078.8gf 50.9gf).
7-67
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
CAUTION
During the operation, note the following points.

The PF speed reduction belt tension specification is 40.0 2.0N
Since the specification includes the tension gauge error (1.5N), adjust to 40.00.5N in
actual adjustment, setting the error limit to half of one graduation (0.5N).
7.6 PF Encoder Assembly Position Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the PF encoder assembly.
After replacing the PF encoder, adjust the PF encoder position.
7.6.1
Adjustment Procedure
To adjust PF encoder, follow the steps below.

1. Loosen the screws retaining the PF encoder assembly.
No.
Part name
PF encoder assembly
PF encoder scale

2. Align the PF encoder assembly so that the corner covers the periphery of the PF encoder scale, then fix
the PF encoder assembly with screws.
Rev.-01
7-68
No.
Part name
PF encoder assembly
PF encoder scale
7 Adjustment
NOTE
Align the PF encoder so that the encoder scale slit periphery came very close to the corners of the PF
encoder.
PF encorder scale
come very close to
this point.
PF encorder scale
PF encorder
3. Attach the slit guide to the PF encoder assembly

No.
Part name
Slit guide
Scale
PF scale assembly
4. Turn the scale around to check that the scale does not swing toward the speed reduction pulley from the
center of the encoder gap. If it swings, adjust the PF encoder assembly position again.
NOTE
There is no problem even if the scale hits the slit guide when turned around.
7-69
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.7 CR Belt Tension Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the CR belt.
When you have removed and installed the CR belt, adjust the CR belt tension.
1. Tighten the CR tension mounting shaft, and align the left side (viewed from the front of the printer) of
the graduation alignment pointer with the center line of graduations on the driven pulley base.
2
No.
Part name
Driven pulley base
Driven pulley base graduations
Graduation alignment pointer
CR tension mounting shaft
2. After adjustment, apply screw-locking agent to the screw head of the CR tension mounting shaft not to
loosen it.
No.
1
Rev.-01
7-70
Part name
Driven pulley base graduations
CR tension mounting shaft screw

head
7 Adjustment
CAUTION
To align the graduation alignment pointer with the center line of driven pulley base, align the
left side (viewed from the front of the printer) of the pointer with the center line as shown
below.
Alignment pointer
L side
R side
Alignment pointer
Align them like this.
7.8 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in horizontal direction.
When you have removed and installed the head assembly, such as for head assembly replacement, always
adjust the head slant and depth following the steps below.
NOTE
Before starting adjustment, remove the following parts.
CR board cover:
Cable cover R:
"4.6.1 Replacing Print Head" p.4-56

Adjust the horizontal height of the head alignment before adjusting the vertical alignment slant of
head alignment.
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
7-71
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in Head Slant Check
Menu 1.
"5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-29
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
#
OO
&
'
A: Check the slant at this point.

C: OK
D: Move the head adjusting cam upward.
E: Move the head adjusting cam downward.
3. Move the head adjusting cam lever to adjust head slant.
No.
Rev.-01
7-72
Part name
Head adjusting cam
Head mounting plate
7 Adjustment
7.9 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)

This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in vertical direction.
After operation such as head assembly replacement, adjust the head slant according to the steps below.
NOTE
CR board cover:
Cable cover R:

Before aligning print head in vertical direction, perform the alignment in horizontal direction.
"7.8 Head Alignment (Horizontal Height)" p.7-71
In this procedure, align the print head in the direction shown below.
Print head
Side view
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode and print the adjustment patterns in Head Slant Check
Menu 2.
"5.7.4 Head Slant Check Menu" p.5-29
7-73
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
2. Make adjustment based on the printed adjustment patterns.
#
$
$
#
$
#
#
$
%%9
#
$
$
#
$
#
#
$
%9
'
&
A: Check the point to check the vertical slant angle.

C: OK
D: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the right.
E: Move the vertical-slant adjusting tab to the left.
Rev.-01
7-74
7 Adjustment
3. Loosen the vertical-slant adjusting tab screw and move the tab left and right to adjust the head vertical
angle.
No.
Part name
Vertical-slant adjusting tab
Vertical-slant adjusting tab

screw
7.10 Cutter Holder Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the cutter holder height.
7.10.1 Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for cutter holder height adjustment.
Cutter holder jig (VJ): JD-42804
TIP
7.10.2 Adjustment Procedure

NOTE
Cable cover L
To make adjustment, follow the steps below.
7-75
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
1. Loosen the screws ( 2) which fix cutter holder.

No.
Part name
Cutter holder
Screws fixing cutter holder

2. Place the jig cutter holder (VJ) on the front of pressure arm, which is the third one from the origin.

No.
Rev.-01
Part name
Pressure arm
Platen
Jig set position
Cutter holder jig (VJ)
7-76
7 Adjustment
3. Place the cutter holder on the side face of the jig, set the cutter holder to the depression of the jig, and
hold the cutter holder down from above. Make sure that the part indicated by a circle in the figure holds
the cutter holder, fasten the tentatively-tightened screw fully and determine the cutter holder height.
No.
Part name
Cutter holder
Cutter holder jig (VJ)

7-77
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7.11 PG Height Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to check the carriage height (distance from the platen).
7.11.1 Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for carriage height (distance from the platen) check.
PG height checking jig (VJ): JD-42806
TIP
7.11.2 Adjustment Procedure

Follow the steps below to adjust the platen height.
1. When moving the carriage, place the PG height checking jig onto the platen.
No.
Part name
PG height checking jig
Platen
2. Move the carriage from the origin side while the head height adjusting lever is in LOW.
3. Check that the carriage can pass through a gap above the 1.1mm part of the PG height checking jig and
cannot pass through a gap above the 1.3mm part.
No.
OO
OO

Rev.-01
7-78
Part name
PG height checking jig
Head
7 Adjustment
4. Reverse the direction of the jig and move the carriage from the opposite side of the origin.
5. If the result of step 3 is NG, readjust the PG height by moving two height adjust cams on both left and
right of carriage.
To raise the head height: Rotate cam upward.
To lower the head height: Rotate cam downward.
Left view
Right view
No.
Part name
Height adjustment cam
Carriage
NOTE
The left and right cam changes the height separately. Make sure that follow the steps 3 to 4 and check
both left and right of the head height is proper by using PG height checking jig.
6. Apply adhesion bond to the height adjustment cam and fix the height.
7. Return the carriage to the origin side.
8. Close the covers.
7.12 Media Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

This section describes the procedure to adjust the sensitivity of media sensor.
When you have removed and installed the sensors below or MAIN board assembly, always adjust the
sensitivity of media sensor
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
7-79
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
NOTE
When you adjust the sensor sensitivity, note the following;
Any ambient light, such as sun light or room light, does not interfere with the sensor.
Keep the media holding lever down so that the media is stable on the sensor during adjustment.
If media is not securely held, the sensor detection accuracy may be decreased.
Use non-conductive screwdriver when operating the trimmer on the MAIN board assembly.
If a conductive screwdriver contacts with electronic component on the MAIN board or frame,
it may cause a short-circuit.
Before adjusting sensor sensitivity, perform the following work.
Install all covers except for media guide R2.
"4.2 Removal of Covers" p.4-5
7.12.1 P_EDGE Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

(1) Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for P_EDGE sensor sensitivity adjustment.
Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
Rev.-01
7-80
7 Adjustment
(2) Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_EDGE sensor, follow the steps below.
1. Start the system in self-diagnosis function mode.
NOTE
Start the self-diagnosis function before setting the test media. Otherwise, suction fan is not rotated
and you cannot get correct setting value.
TIP
"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-5
2. Select Check: Test from the self-diagnosis menu.

3. After confirming that the check: Test is displayed in the operation panel, set the test media on the media
base position and down the media hold lever.
Confirm that the suction fan starts rotating.
NOTE
The suction fan will not be rotated if the [Enter] key is pressed before setting the test media. Make
sure to press the [Enter] key after setting the test media.
4. Select Test4: Sensor from the inspection menu.

5. Select Sen6: Edge AD from the sensor menu.
7. Press the cutter cap with a finger and release the carriage lock.
8. Move the carriage to the center of the test media.
7-81
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
9. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes 216 10.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
Trimmer R361: Rough adjustment
Trimmer R365: Fine adjustment
Main board
1
No.
Part name
Trimmer R361
Trimmer R365
10. Adjust the P_EDGE sensor adjusting volumes so that the value displayed in the operation panel becomes
216 10.
11. Move the paper edge sensor to the non reflective tape area.
No.
Part name
Metal measure
Non reflective tape
12. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is 80 or less.
Rev.-01
7-82
7 Adjustment
7.12.2 P_REAR Sensor Adjustment

(1) Jigs and Tools
The following jigs and tools are required for P_REAR sensor adjustment.
Test media: MF-3G (A4)
TIP
(2) Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the P_REAR sensor, follow the steps below.
1. Sets the standard media.
2. Start up the self-diagnosis function.
TIP
"5.2.2 Starting Up" p.5-5
3. Select Check: Test from the self-diagnosis menu.

4. Select Test: Sensor from the inspection menu.
5. Select Sen: Rear from the sensor menu.
7-83
Rev.-01
7 Adjustment
7. Adjust the P_REAR sensor adjusting volumes as shown below so that the value displayed in the operation
panel becomes 216 10.
Counterclockwise: Sensitivity increases
Clockwise: Sensitivity decreases
Trimmer R371: Rough adjustment
Trimmer R373: Fine adjustment
Main board
2
No.
Part name
Trimmer R371
Trimmer R373
8. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is 216 10.
9. Remove the standard media.
10. Check that the value displayed in the operation panel is 80 or below.
Rev.-01
7-84
8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
8.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2
Periodical Services ................................................................................. 8- 3

8.2.1 Periodical Replacement Parts........................................................ 8-3
8.2.2 Parts need to be checked or replaced ........................................... 8-3
8.3
Part Life Information............................................................................... 8- 5
8.4
Lubrication/Bonding............................................................................... 8- 7
8.5
Transportation of Printer........................................................................ 8- 8
8-1
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
8.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding, and transport.
WARNING
Before starting any maintenance work, always perform the following operations.
Turn the printer. power OFF.
Remove the power cable from the power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
CAUTION
Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.
When servicing the machinery inside with some covers removed, pay special attention
not to be injured by the driving mechanisms.
Maintenance must be done by more than two person for the following work.
When disassembling or reassembling the printer and the optional stand
When packing the printer for transportation
Rev.-01
8-2
8 Maintenance
8.2 Periodical Services

This section describes the periodical services required for this printer.
The periodical services ensures stable plotting quality of the printer.
Follow the explanations below to perform periodical inspections necessary.
TIP
Operation manual
Separate sheet Exploded view P.2-P.10
8.2.1
Periodical Replacement Parts
The parts shown below need to be replaced per year.

Table 8-1 Parts to be replaced
Maintenance part name
(Maintenance part no.)
VJ13 periodical replacement kit
(DG-41152)
CR belt assembly (VJ13) (DG37140)
Part to be replaced
Reference
Damper assembly
"4.6.1 Replacing
Print Head" p.4-56
"4.7 Replacement of
Maintenance Section
Components" p.4-66
Cleaner head assembly
"4.7.3 Replacing
Cleaner Head (Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-71
CR belt
"4.5.5 Replacing CR
Driven Pulley and CR
belt" p.4-53
8-3
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
8.2.2
Parts need to be checked or replaced

Table 8-2 Periodical Inspection Part List
Part
Media guide L
Sub platen front surface
Timing
Several times per
year
Check point
Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Damages
Action
Clean it.
NOTE
If ink deposits
are present,
remove them
with a dampened
cloth and wipe
the area with a
clean dry cloth.
Timing fence
(CR encoder detection
slit plate)
Several times per

year
Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Damages
Clean it.
Rail on the CR guide

frame
Several times per

year
Foreign objects
Clean it.
P_REAR sensor front

surface
Several times per

year
Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Clean it.
Cleaner head
(Cleaning wiper)
Several times per

year
Ink deposits
Damages
Clean it.
Rev.-01
8-4
If any damages are found,

replace the part.
"4.5.4 Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
8 Maintenance
8.3 Part Life Information

This section shows how to check the life of the service parts.
To know the life of the service parts, check the maintenance counter from the counter display menu in the
maintenance mode.
TIP
"6.3.1 Counter Display Menu" p.6-4
Part life information of this printer is shown in the table below.
Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy

Part
Life expectancy
Warning
display
How to
restore
Replacement
parts
References
Waste fluid tank Warning at

600,000 times of
counting
(equivalent to
600ml)
Full Waste
Ink Tank
CR motor
4,700,000 passes
Life Times
[CR Motor]
CR motor
initialization
At the first
warning:
CR motor
CR Driven
pulley
(Check the ink
tube and the CR
cable.)
At the next
warning:
CR cable
besides above
"4.5.1 CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-46
"4.5.5
Replacing CR
Driven Pulley
and CR belt"
p.4-53
"4.10.2
Replacing Ink
Tube" p.4-86
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
PF motor
20 Km
Life Times
[PF Motor]
PF motor
initialization
Replace as
necessary
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-40
Print head
6 109 (6 thousand Life Times

million) dots
[Head]
Head unit
initialization
Replace as
necessary
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
8-5
By
Waste ink box
pressing
(Replaced by
[Enter]
users)
key while
replacing
the counter
to the new
one.
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
Table 8-3 List of Parts Life Expectancy (Continued)

Part
Pump
Rev.-01
Life expectancy
60 million
pulses(182,000
rotations)
Warning
display
Life Times
[Pump]
8-6
How to
restore
Pump
initialization
Replacement
parts
Replace as
necessary
References
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
8 Maintenance
8.4 Lubrication/Bonding
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information.
After disassembling/assembling this printer, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding according to
Table 8-4"Lubricant List"(p.6).
CAUTION
Only use specified lubricants and greases. The use of unauthorized lubricants and greases
may damage the components and shorten the printer life.
Table 8-4 Lubricant List

Parts
Cover section
Item
Manufacturer
Type
Roll receiver
(L, R)
Apply to the top

cover contacting
surface.
Dow Corning
Toray Co.,Ltd.
MOLYKOTE
(R)EM-60L
GREASE
Front cover
support pin L
Apply to the top

cover contacting
surface.
Dow Corning
Toray Co.,Ltd.
MOLYKOTE
(R)EM-60L
GREASE
Cursor guide
Apply to the front

surface.
Mitsubishi
Super multidia tetrat

No.32
Pressure
shaft bearing
Apply to the
peripheral surface.
Dow Corning
Toray Co.,Ltd.
MOLYKOTE
(R)EM-60L
GREASE
Pressure
shaft stopper
Apply to the
pressure lever
springs.
Dow Corning
Toray Co.,Ltd.
MOLYKOTE
(R)EM-60L
GREASE
Head section
Head cable
Affix to each cable

(for locating and
holding)
Not specified
10mm- width
double faced
tape
Cable guide
section
CR cable
Affix to each cable

(for locating)
Not specified
10mm-width
double faced
tape
Tube guide
Affix to the tube

guide (for
locating)
Not specified
10mm-width
double faced
tape
Screw
Apply to the area

screw-locking
agent is applied.
Three Bond
Co., Ltd.
1401
CR section
Others
8-7
Exploded
view
Rev.-01
8 Maintenance
8.5 Transportation of Printer

This section describes how to transport the printer.
Before transporting the printer, you must package it in the same manner as it was delivered using protective
materials and packaging materials so that the printer will not be subject to excessive impact and vibrations
during the transportation.
Follow the steps below to package the printer.
(1) Task Before Transportation

1. Turn the printer power ON.
2. Verify that the printer is in normal state.
3. Remove all ink cartridges.
4. Turn OFF the printer.
5. The operation panel shows Transport Mode and the printer begins ink discharging operation.
6. It takes about two minutes for discharging ink.
7. Check that ink discharging is complete and the Power lamp is off.
8. Remove the scroller.
9. Remove all cables including the power cable.
10. Fit the printer with protective materials.
TIP
Operation manual
11. If the optional stand is used, separate the printer from the stand.
TIP
Operation manual
12. Package the printer.
(2) Task After Transportation

1. Unpack, assemble, and install the printer.
2. Make the printer ready for operation.
Rev.-01
8-8
9 Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
9.1
Introduction ............................................................................................. 9- 2
9.2
Troubleshooting with Error Messages ................................................. 9- 2

9.2.1 Operation Status ............................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Errors with Message ...................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot ................................................................ 9-9
9.2.4 Error Messages During File Transmission................................... 9-25
9.3
Troubleshooting Without Error Messages ......................................... 9- 30

9.3.1 Initial Operation Problems............................................................ 9-30
9.3.2 Media Feed Problems.................................................................. 9-39
9.3.3 Printing Problems......................................................................... 9-41
9.3.4 Noise Problems............................................................................ 9-59
9.3.5 Online Function Problems............................................................ 9-62
9.3.6 Other Problems............................................................................ 9-65
9.3.7 Troubleshooting For A Dedicated Network Software................... 9-67
9-1
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on possible causes of machine errors/damage and recovery actions.
If the machine is malfunctioning and an error message is displayed on the operation panel, refer to "9.2
Troubleshooting with Error Messages" p.9-2. If the machine is malfunctioning but no error messages are
displayed, refer to "9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages" p.9-30.
If cause of errors/damage and recovery actions are not found in this chapter, or the machine cannot restore to
normal status, please contact the distributor your purchased the product from or our customer support center.
9.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

This section describes the messages displayed in normal operation and upon an error occurrence as well as
how to correct the error.
The available messages are as follows.
Table 9-1 Error Message Type

Priority
Message type
Contents
Reference
Operation status
Displayed when the machine is operating normally.
"9.2.1
Operation
Status" p.9-3
Error with
message
Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs

during normal operation.
"9.2.2
Errors with
Message" p.9-5
Data error
Displayed when a data communication error occurs

between PC and the machine.
"9.2.3
Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-9
Command error
Displayed when an abnormal condition occurs

during analysis of PC commands.
"9.2.3
Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-9
Error requiring
reboot
Displayed when a serious error critical to the

machine operation occurs.
"9.2.3
Errors
Requiring
Reboot" p.9-9
Rev.-01
9-2
9.2.1
9 Troubleshooting
Operation Status
This section describes the message contents, check items, and recovery actions for normal operation.
These messages appear on LCD, and the machine stops its operation at the same time.
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Is cover sensor
assembly loose?
Action
Tighten cover sensor
assembly screws.
Reference
Cover Open
Front cover is
open.
"4.8.3
Replacing
Cover Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-78
Lever Up
Media holding 1. Is cover sensor

Correctly connect cover
"4.3.3
lever is turned
assembly cable
sensor assembly cables Replacing
backward.
connected securely? to main board assembly Main Board
connector J117.
Assembly"
p.4-26
2. Does pressure lever Lubricate pressure cam.
"8.4
move smoothly?
Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-7
3. Is lever sensor
assembly fitted
correctly?
Adjust lever sensor

assembly position.
4. Is sensor of lever
sensor assembly
contaminated?
Clean sensor face using

"4.5.3
a swab.
Replacing
Lever
Sensor" p.449
5.
Correctly connect lever

"4.5.3
sensor assembly cables Replacing
to main board assembly Lever
connector J132.
Sensor" p.449
Is lever sensor
cable connected
securely?
"4.5.3
Replacing
Lever
Sensor" p.449
6. Check the cover

sensor from "Sen
4:Cover" of selfdiagnosis function.
Replace cover sensor

assembly.
"4.8.3
Replacing
Cover Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-78
7. Check the lever

sensor from "Sen
5:Lever" of selfdiagnosis function.
Replace lever sensor

assembly.
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
9-3
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-2 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages (Continued)
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Lever Up
Media holding 8. Main board

lever is turned
assembly may be
backward.
damaged.
Media End
Displayed
1. Is P_EDGE sensor Securely connect it to
when media is
assembly cable at
CR board assembly
not set
the head section
connector J211.
connected
correctly?
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
2. Is P_REAR sensor
assembly under
media guide R
connected
correctly?
Securely connect it to
main board assembly
connector J114.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
3. Check sensor
sensitivity from
"Sen 6:EdgeAD" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Adjust with main board

assembly volume
(R117, R119).
Replace P_EDGE
sensor assembly.
"7.12.1
P_EDGE
Sensor
Sensitivity
Adjustment"
p.7-80
4. CR board assembly Replace CR board

may be damaged.
assembly.
Rev.-01
Reference
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
5. Check presence of
media from "Sen
7:Rear" of selfdiagnosis function.
When "Media End" is

"4.9.2
displayed even if media Replacing
is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
sensor assembly.
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-83
6. CR cable may be
broken.
Replace CR cable.
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
7. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-4
9.2.2
9 Troubleshooting
Errors with Message
This section describes the contents of errors with messages as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These messages are displayed when an abnormal condition occurs while the machine is running.
Upon an occurrence of an error with message, the machine stops its operation at the same time.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes. After that, the machine will restart its operation.
Table 9-3 Events and Check Items for Errors with Messages
No.
1
Message
Undefined
Media
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
Media
1. Is P_EDGE sensor
detection failed
assembly cable at
head connected
correctly?
CR board assembly
connector J211.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
2. Is P_REAR sensor
under media guide
R connected
correctly?
main board assembly
connector J130, J131.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
3. Check sensor
sensitivity from
"Sen 6:EdgeAD" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Adjust with main

board assembly
volume (R361,
R365).
Replace P_EDGE
sensor assembly.
4. Is CR cable inserted Reconnect following

obliquely?
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J110 J114
5. CR cable may be
broken.
CR board: J201 J205
"7.12.1
P_EDGE
Sensor
Sensitivity
Adjustment"
p.7-80
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
Replace CR cable.
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
6. CR board assembly Replace CR board

may be damaged.
assembly.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
9-5
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-3 Events and Check Items for Errors with Messages (Continued)
No.
1
Message
Undefined
Media
Event/
symptom
Check item
Media
7. Check presence of
detection failed
media from "Sen
7:Rear" of selfdiagnosis function.
8. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
Media Slant
Media is
running
obliquely.
Action
Reference
When "Media End" is

"4.9.2
displayed even if media Replacing
is set, replace P_REAR P_REAR
sensor.
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-83
Replace main board
assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
1. Set media again and If this error is caused by check reappearance. user's inappropriate
media setting, instruct
correct media setting
procedure.
2. Is suction fan works
normally when
checked through
Fan1: Vacum Fan
of "Test6: Fan" of
self-diagnosis
function?
- Check connection of
following main board
assembly connectors.
Suction fan 1 cable:
J128
Suction fan 2 cable:
J127
Suction fan L cable:
J126
Replace suction fan
assembly.
Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate
normally.
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
3. Is shielding material Remount it at specified secured at specified position.

position?
Rev.-01
4. Check pressure
lever operation.
Apply grease (G501) to

"8.4
pressure cam and make Lubrication/
adjustment.
Bonding"
p.8-7
5. Is P_EDGE sensor
assembly cable at
head connected
correctly?
CR board assembly
connector J211.
9-6
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
9 Troubleshooting
No.
2
Message
Media Slant
[KCMY]
Ink Near End
[KCMY]
Ink End
[KCMY]
No Cartridge
Event/
symptom
Media is
running
obliquely.
Check item
6. Check sensor
sensitivity from
"Sen 6:EdgeAD" of
self-diagnosis
function.
Ink is running 1. Check contact of the

short. Printing
ink sensor
is possible.
assembly.
Ink has run out.
Any printing
operation stops
immediately.
Action
Reference
Adjust with main

board assembly
volume (R361,
R365).
"7.12.1
P_EDGE
Sensor
Sensitivity
Adjustment"
p.7-80
Replace P_EDGE
sensor assembly.
Reconnect following
connectors.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER JUNCTION
board:
Connector J5(K)
Connector J6(C)
Connector J7(M)
Connector J8(Y)
2. For the ink color
that is displayed as
"Ink Near End" or
"Ink End", switch
ink sensor assembly
connector with that
of normally
displayed ink color.
If ink color display

changes after
replacing
connector:
Ink sensor assembly
is damaged.
Replace ink sensor
assembly.
If ink color display

does not change
after replacing
connector:
JUNCTION board
assembly may be
damaged.Replace
JUNCTION board
assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.8.1
Replacing
Ink Holder (I/
H)
Assembly"
p.4-73
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Cartridge is not 1. Turn machine OFF. If message appears:

installed.
Turn it ON again
Refer to action in check
and check if the
item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Check contact of
ink NOT sensor
assembly
connector.
9-7
Reconnect following
connectors.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER JUNCTION
board:
Connector J5(K)
Connector J6(C)
Connector J7(M)
Connector J8(Y)
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
4
Message
[KCMY]
No Cartridge
[KCMY]Not
Original
Rev.-01
Event/
symptom
Check item
Cartridge is not 3. For the ink color

installed.
that is displayed as
"Little ink" or "No
ink", switch ink
NOT sensor
assembly connector
with that of
normally displayed
ink color.
Action
Reference
If ink color displayed as

"No ink" changes after
replacing connector:
Ink sensor assembly is
damaged. Replace ink
sensor assembly.
"4.8.1
Replacing
Ink Holder (I/
H)
Assembly"
p.4-73
If ink color displayed as

"No ink" does not
change after replacing
connector:
JUNCTION board
assembly may be
damaged.Replace
JUNCTION board
assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Specified ink 1. Check if the same If the message appears: cartridge is not
message appear if Refer to the action in
installed.
turning machine
check item No. 2.
OFF and turn it ON
again.
2. Check if specified
ink cartridge is
used.
Replace ink cartridge

with specified one.
Operation
Manual
3. Check if a new ink

cartridge is detected
normally while
pushing in / pulling
out the cartridge.
If detection does not

operate normally,
replace following parts.
Ink sensor assembly
Main board assembly
"4.8.1
Replacing
Ink Holder (I/
H)
Assembly"
p.4-73
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
4. Check contact of
ink ID sensor
assembly
connector.
- Reconnect following
main board assembly
connectors.
MAIN board: J43
HEATER JUNCTION
board:
Connector J5(K)
Connector J6(C)
Connector J7(M)
Connector J8(Y)
If no change occurs,
proceed to step (5).
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-8
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
Warning:
Waste fluid
box full
Event/
symptom
Waste fluid
tank is almost
full.
Check item
Warning: Ink
tube life
Ink tube life

has almost
expired.
Reference
1. Turn machine OFF. If the message appears: Turn it ON again

Refer to the action in
and check if the
check item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Waste ink in waste
fluid box reaches
full level.
Action
Replace waste fluid box.
Operation
Manual
1. Turn machine OFF. If the message appears: Turn it ON again

Refer to the action in
and check if the
check item No. 2.
same message
appears.
2. Use of ink tube has Replace ink tube.
exceeded specified
level.
"4.10.2
Replacing
Ink Tube"
p.4-86
NOTE
The square bracket pair in an error message contains the applicable ink color.
If no ink and no cartridge occur at the same time, no cartridge message has priority to be displayed.
9.2.3
Errors Requiring Reboot
This section describes the contents of reboot-requiring errors as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These errors are issued when any of the following critical problems occurs.
Obstacle that prevents the machine's operation
Damage of electric circuits (boards, motors, sensors)
Abnormal operation of control programs
When any of the above conditions occurs, the machine follows the steps shown below before stopping its
operation.
1. Turn OFF the driving system power automatically.
2. Flash all lamps in the operation panel and generate intermittent audible alarm.
3. Display the applicable error message on the LCD.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes and restarting the machine.
9-9
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
(1) CPU system serious error

Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors
No.
1
Message
E 016 error
Interrupt
[00]
E 016 error
TLB Modif
[01]
Rev.-01
Event/
symptom
Interruption
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
interruption
process.
Check item
1. Check AC power
supply and printer
surrounding
equipment.
2. Check reappearance
by turning ON/OFF
the machine power
several times. Make
sure to perform this
check repeatedly
even if no problems
seem to be present.
(Make the same
condition as user's.)
Command
border
exception/TLB
exception (load
or command
fetch) error:
Abnormal
condition in
command
border.
Or TLB
exception in
data load or
command
fetch.
9-10
Action
Contact our customer
support center.
Reference
Operation
Manual
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-4 Symptoms and Check Items for CPU System Serious Errors (Continued)
No.
3
Message
E 016 error
TLB-L/I
[02]
Event/
symptom
Check item
Data border
3. Check serial
exception/TLB
number of the
exception
printer.
Action
4. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
E 016 error
TLB-S
[03]
Data border
exception/TLB
exception
(store) error:
Abnormal
condition in
data border.
Or TLB
exception in
data storing.
E 016 error
AddErr-L/I
[04]
Address
exception error
(load or
command
fetch):
Address error
in command
load or fetch.
E 016 error
AddErr-S
[05]
Address
exception error
(store):
Address error
in saving
process.
E 016 error
BusErr-I
[06]
Pass exception 1. Check serial

error
number of the
(command
printer.
fetch):
2. Main board
Address error
assembly may be
in command
defective.
loading or
storing
Bus exception
error (load or
store):
Bus error in
command
loading or
storing
E 016 error
BusErr-L
[07]
1. Check serial
number of the
printer.
2. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
9-11
Reference
Contact our
customer support
center.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Replace main board Assembly"
p.4-26
assembly.
Contact our
customer support
center.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
p.4-26
assembly.
Contact our
customer support
center.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
Replace main board p.4-26
assembly.
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
9
Message
E 016 error
SystemCall
[08]
Event/
symptom
System call
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
system call
10
E 016 error
BreakPoint
[09]
Break point
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
break point
11
E 016 error
Reserverd
[10]
Reserved
command
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
reserved
command
12
E 016 error
Copro
[11]
Coprocessor
disabled
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
coprocessor
Rev.-01
Check item
1. Check serial
number of the
printer.
2. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
9-12
Action
Contact our
customer support
center.
Reference
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
assembly.
9 Troubleshooting
No.
13
Message
E 016 error
Overflow
[12]
Event/
symptom
Arithmetic
overflow
exception
error:
Overflow
occurs
14
E 016 error
Trap
[13]
Trap exception
error:
Trap occurs
15
E 016 error
Floating
[15]
Floating point
exception
error:
Abnormal
condition in
floating point
process
16
E 016 error
WatchDog
[32]
Watchdog
time-out
exception
error:
Time-out in
watchdog
17
E 016 error
Abort Err
[33]
Abort error:
Process
aborted
Check item
1. Check AC power
supply and printer
surrounding
equipment.
Action
Contact our
customer support
center.
3. Check serial
number of the
printer.
Contact our
customer support
center.
4. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
Replace main board

assembly.
Reference
2. Check reappearance
by turning ON/OFF
the machine power
several times. Make
sure to perform this
check repeatedly
even if no problems
seem to be present.
(Make the same
condition as user's.)
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-13
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
NOTE
For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.
(2) Mechanical Serious Errors

Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors
No.
1
Message
E 065 error
PF motor
Event/
symptom
Check item
Abnormal
1. Check error history
condition in PF
from "Test7:
motor (X-axis)
Record." of selfduring printer
diagnosis function.
operation.
2. Set the number of
Displayed if
endurance running
the difference
cycles to 50 or more
between motor
from Check10:
command
Endurance of
value and
"Life2: PF Motor"
feedback from
of self-diagnosis
encoder is
function, and check
large.
if "X motor error"
occurs.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5:
Encoder" of selfdiagnosis function.
Action
-
Check connection of
PF motor cable
assembly
connector: J20
PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
If NG, check
connection of main
"4.4.1
board assembly
Replacing PF
connector: J12.
Motor
Replace PF motor Assembly"
assembly.
p.4-40
Rev.-01
9-14
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
4. PF motor assembly
may be defective.
5. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
Reference
"4.3.3
Replace main board
Replacing
assembly.
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-5 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors (Continued)
No.
2
Message
E 066 error
CR motor
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Abnormal
1. Check error history condition in
from "Test7:
CR motor (YRecord" of selfaxis) during
diagnosis function.
printer
Clean and lubricate
2. Move carriage in
operation.
CR rail roller guide.
both directions
Displayed if
while the printer is Check connection
the difference
of following
turned off, and
between motor
connectors.
check if there is any
command
position where
Main board:
value and
carriage does not
CR motor assembly
feedback from
move smoothly.
connector: J21
encoder is
large.
3. Set the number of CR cable connector:
J9 - J11
endurance running
cycles to 50 or more CR board:
from Check10:
CR cable connector:
Endurance of
J201 - J205
"Life1: CR motor"
of self-diagnosis
function, and check
if "Y motor error"
occurs.
9-15
Reference
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
"8.4
Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-7
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
3
Message
E 067 error
PF encoder
Event/
symptom
Check item
Abnormal
condition in
from "Test7:
media feed
Record" of
amount (XCheck2: Test of
axis) during
self-diagnosis
printer
function.
operation.
Displayed if
endurance running
there is no
feedback from
from Check10:
encoder.
Endurance of
"Life2: PF Motor"
of self-diagnosis
function, and check
if "X motor error"
occurs.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5:
Encoder" of
Check2: Test of
self-diagnosis
function.
may be defective.
5. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
Rev.-01
9-16
Action
Reference
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
Check connection of
PF motor cable
assembly
connector: J20
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
PF_ENC assembly
connector: J12
If NG, check
connection of main
board assembly
connector: J12.
Replace PF motor
assembly.
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Motor
p.4-40
assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9 Troubleshooting
No.
4
Message
E 068 error
CR encoder
Event/
symptom
Check item
Abnormal
condition in
from of Check2:
head travel
Test - "Test7:
distance (YRecord" axis) during
Record2: Error of
printer
self-diagnosis
operation.
function.
Displayed if
2. Move carriage in
there is no
both directions
feedback from
while the printer is
encoder.
turned off, and
check if there is any
position where
carriage does not
move smoothly.
Action
-
Reference
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
Clean and lubricate

"8.4
CR rail roller guide. Lubrication/
Check connection Bonding"
p.8-7
of following
connectors.
Main board:
"4.3.3
CR motor assembly Replacing
connector: J21
Main Board
CR cable connector: Assembly"
J9 - J11
p.4-26
CR board:
3. Set the number of CR cable connector:
endurance running
J201 - J205
from Check10:
Endurance of
"Life1: CR motor"
of self-diagnosis
function, and check
if "Y motor error"
occurs.
9-17
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Message
E069 error
PF time-out
Event/
symptom
Time-out
condition in
media feed
amount (Xaxis) during
printer
operation.
Displayed if
pressure roller
does not reach
the defined
position.
Check item
1. Check error history from Check2:

Test - "Test7:
Record" Record2: Error of
self-diagnosis
Check connection of
function.
PF motor cable
endurance running
assembly
connector: J20
from Check10:
PF_ENC assembly
Endurance of
connector: J12
"Life2: PF Motor"
of self-diagnosis
If NG, check
function, and check
connection of main
if "X motor error"
board assembly
occurs.
connector: J12.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5:
Encoder" of
Check2: Test of
self-diagnosis
function.
may be defective.
5. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
Rev.-01
Action
9-18
Reference
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Replace PF motor
assembly.
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Replace main board Motor
Assembly"
assembly.
p.4-40
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9 Troubleshooting
No.
6
Message
Event/
symptom
E 070 error
CR time-out
Time-out
condition in
head travel
distance (Yaxis) during
printer
operation.
Displayed if
carriage does
not reach the
defined
position.
Check item
Action
1. Check error history from Check2:

Test - "Test7:
Record" Record2: Error of
self-diagnosis
Check connection of
function.
PF motor cable
endurance running
assembly
connector: J20
from Check10:
PF_ENC assembly
Endurance of
connector: J12
"Life2: PF Motor"
of self-diagnosis
If NG, check
function, and check
connection of main
if "X motor error"
board assembly
occurs.
connector: J12.
3. Check "Encoder:
PF" from "Test5:
Encoder" of
Check2: Test of
self-diagnosis
function.
4. Check if Main
Power Board
normally supplies
DC24V.
may be defective.
Reference
"5.5.7
History
Menu" p.5-18
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Replace PF motor
assembly.
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Replace main board Motor
Assembly"
assembly.
p.4-40
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
6. Main board
assembly may be
defective.
9-19
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
E071 error
Overload
7. Check if T fence is
PF overcurrent condition in PF
contaminated or
motor (X-axis)
worn out.
during printer
operation.
E 072 error
Overload
CR overcurrent condition in
CR motor (YE074 error
axis) during
CR2
printer
overcurrent
operation.
9. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
9-20
Reference
If grease or dust
"4.5.4
collect: Wipe fence Replacing T
with a dry cloth.
Fence" p.4-50
If ink deposit
presents: Wipe it off
with cloth
dampened with
neutral detergent.
8. Check "CR
Encoder" from
"Test5: Encoder" of
Check2: Test of
self-diagnosis
function.
Rev.-01
Action
"4.5.4
If contamination or Replacing T
deposit is too heavy: Fence" p.4-50
Replace T fence.
a) If NG:
Check following cable
connection.
"4.5.4
CR board assembly Replacing T
connector J207
Fence" p.4-50
"4.5.1 CR
b) Replace following
Motor
parts.
Assembly"
T fence
CR motor assembly p.4-46
"4.10.1
CR board assembly
Replacing
CR
CR cable
Board
Assembly"
"4.10.3
assembly.
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9 Troubleshooting
No.
10
11
Message
Event/
symptom
E075Err Head Abnormal

Cable
condition in
head cable or
head
thermistor.
E 076 error
pre-heater
system
Abnormal
condition in
pre-heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
Check item
Action
1. Check connection Reconnect head cable.

of head cable
connectors on CR
board assembly side
and head side.
Is head cable
inserted obliquely?
Is it locked
securely?
E077Err Platen Abnormal

Heat
condition in
platen heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
2. Is head cable
broken?
Replace head cable.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
3. Head thermistor
may be faulty.
Replace Print head

assembly.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
Disconnection of
connector, wrong
wiring, or heater
malfunction of
thermistor and heater
may be occurred.
1. Reconnect
connector of
thermistor and
heater.
"4.4.4
Replacing
Heater and
Thermistor
Assembly"
p.4-44
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-21
2. Check connection
of board section.
3. Replace heater.
12
Reference
Disconnection of
connector, wrong
wiring, or heater
malfunction of
may be occurred.
1. Reconnect
connector of
thermistor and
heater.
2. Check connection
of board section.
3. Replace heater.
9-21
"4.4.4
Replacing
Heater and
Thermistor
Assembly"
p.4-44
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-21
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
13
E078Err After
Heat
Event/
symptom
Abnormal
condition in
after-heater
system
(thermistor,
heater).
Check item
Disconnection of
connector, wrong
wiring, or heater
malfunction of
may be occurred.
Action
1. Reconnect
connector of
thermistor and
heater.
2. Check connection
of board section.
3. Replace heater.
14
E079Err
Commu.
Abnormal
condition in
serial communication
between main
board to
controller
board during
printing
operation.
15
E080Err
Junction
Rev.-01
Reference
"4.4.4
Replacing
Heater and
Thermistor
Assembly"
p.4-44
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-21
Communication
1. Check connection
"4.3
cable may be faulty.
between main board Replacement
to controller board. of Board Base
F/W on controller
board may be faulty. 2. Check connection Section
Components
between junction
Main board
" p.4-21
board to controller
assembly may be
"5.5.2
board.
damaged.
Version
Controller board
Menu" p.5-13
3. Check firmware
assembly may be
"7.3.5
version and install
faulty.
Firmware
the latest version.
Installation"
Power board
4. Replace controller p.7-19
assembly may be
board or main
"4.3.6
damaged.
board.
Replacing
Power Board
5. Replace power
Assembly"
board assembly.
p.4-31
Abnormal
condition in
serial communication
between
junction board
to controller
board during
printing
operation.
9-22
9 Troubleshooting
No.
16
17
Message
E 081 error
CR origin
E 082 error
wiper sensor
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
CR_HP
1. Check CR_HP
detection is not
sensor from "Sen1:
possible.
CR Origin" of selfdiagnosis function.
Abnormal
condition in
wiper sensor.
Reference
Check connection
of CR_HP sensor
cable assembly
connector.
"5.5.4
Sensor
Menu" p.5-15
2. CR_HP sensor may

be damaged.
Replace CR_HP
sensor.
"4.5.2
Replacing CR
Origin Point
Sensor" p.447
3. Main board
assembly may be
damaged.
"4.3.3
Replace main board
assembly.
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Wiper sensor
assembly may be
faulty.
1. Check connection
of wiper sensor
connector.
Maintenance
assembly may be
damaged.
2. Replace wiper
sensor.
Main board
assembly may be
faulty.
3. Replace wiper
origin cable
assembly.
4. Replace pump cap
assembly.
"4.7.3
Replacing
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.471
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-21
5. Replace main board

assembly.
18
E084Err Head Installed head

Dist.
is incorrect.
Installed head is not

manufactured by other
vendor.
Replace head.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
19
E 085 error
head overheat
Abnormal
condition in
head driver.
Main board assembly

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-21
20
E 086 error
head OVP
Abnormal
condition in
head driver.
Head or head cable may 1. Check connection

be damaged.
of head cable.
2. Replace head.
9-23
"4.6
Replacement
of Head
Section
Components
" p.4-56
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Message
21
E087Err H
Trans Th
22
E090Err
Heater Volt.
Event/
symptom
Check item
Abnormal
Temperature
1. Replace thermistor.
condition in
abnormality of head
2. Replace main
head transistor. transistor on main board
board.
or sensor abnormality of
thermistor may be
occurred.
23
E 097 error
NVRAM
Rev.-01
Action
Reference
"4.4.4
Replacing
Heater and
Thermistor
Assembly"
p.4-44
"4.3
Replacement
of Board Base
Section
Components
" p.4-21
The input voltage of 1. Supply power to the

"4.3.4
AC inlet may be too
AC inlet with
Replacing
high.
proper voltage.
HEATER
CONT board
HEATER CONT
2. Replace HEATER
assembly"
board assembly may
CONT board
p.4-27
be damaged.
assembly.
Abnormal
condition in
NVRAM.
Replace main board

assembly.
9-24
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9.2.4
9 Troubleshooting
Error Messages During File Transmission
This section describes the error messages displayed when sending backup parameters and firmware using
dedicated online software, as well as their recovery actions.
Table 9-6 Error Messages During File Transmission
No.
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Transfer failed Firmware data Check if transferred

Data format
format is
firmware is an
error
inappropriate. appropriate file.
After confirming it,

install firmware again.
Transfer failed Cancel button Aborted by the on PC has been

HOST
pressed.
Transfer firmware
again.
Transfer failed Communication Check connection

After resolving
Data timeout
time-out
between printer and PC. problem, transfer
occurred.
firmware again.
Transfer failed File checksum Check-sum

error.
error
Reference
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
1. Transfer firmware
again.
2. If error message is
still displayed,
check if transferred
firmware is an
appropriate file.
Transfer failed Received

Wrong size
wrong size
xxxxxxxx
data.
Check if program file is After confirming it,

appropriate.
transfer data again.
Transfer failed Incompatible

Incompatible firmware.
F/W
Check if program file is After confirming it,

appropriate.
install firmware again.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
Transfer failed ROM erase

Flash erase
error.
error
Board may be defective. Replace main board.
Transfer failed ROM writing

Flash write
error.
error
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Transfer failed ROM

Flash compare comparing
error
error.
10
Transfer failed FROM written Normally not detected.

Unknown
in unknown
FROM may be
Flash size
method is
defective.
detected.
9-25
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-6 Error Messages During File Transmission (Continued)

No.
11
12
13
Message
Internal Error
Memory
Exhausted
Event/
symptom
No memory
area is
available.
Transfer failed Block reply

Block replay
timeout
timeout
occurred
during system
code transfer.
Check item
Normally not occurred.
SODIMM may be
defective.
Replace SODIMM.
Check connection
between control board
and main board.
Reconnect control
board and main
board.
Replace the cable

connecting control
board and main
board.
Replace control
board.
Replace main
board.
Transfer failed Invalid value is

Block replay
received during
error xx
system code
transfer.
14
Transfer failed Final reply

Final reply
timeout
timeout
occurred
during system
code transfer.
15
Transfer failed Invalid value is

Final reply
received during
error xx
final system
code transfer.
Rev.-01
Action
9-26
Replace main
board.
Reference
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.3.4
Replacing
HEATER
CONT board
assembly"
p.4-27
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9 Troubleshooting

No.
16
Message
Boot Transfer
failed
Opening seq.
failed
Event/
symptom
Check item
Opening
sequence of
boot code
transfer failed.
Check connection
between control
board and main
board.
Check if the green

LED on control
board is lit.
Check if the red

LED on control
board is blinking.
Action
Reconnect control
board and main
board. Otherwise,
replace the cable
connecting control
board and main
board.
If the green LED on

control board is off
after the power is
turned on, replace
the control board.
If the red LED is

blinking and there is
no problem at
connection between
control board and
main board, try to
reinstall firmware.
If the red LED is

off, perform the
following
procedures.
Reference
"4.3.4
Replacing
HEATER
CONT board
assembly"
p.4-27
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"7.3
Working with
MUTOH
Maintenance
Engineer
Assistant"
p.7-8
"7.4
Working with
MUTOH
Service
Assistance"
p.7-30
1. Turn off the power,

then switch the DIP
switch as follows:
1: ON
2: ON
3: ON
4: OFF
2. Start the board
manager mode.
3. Reinstall firmware.
4. Turn off the power,
then switch the DIP
switch as follows:
1: ON
2: OFF
3: ON
4: OFF
5. Turn on the power,
then check if the red
LED is blinking.
9-27
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting

No.
17
Message
Event/
symptom
Check item
Action
Boot Transfer
failed
55-AA
Timeout
AA did not
Check connection
replied to Step between control board
55 of boot code and main board.
transfer.
Boot Transfer
failed
55-AA reply
error xx
xx replied to
Step 55 of boot
code transfer.
19
Boot Transfer
failed
End code xx
An error (xx)
replied to
transfer end of
boot code.
20
Boot Transfer
failed
Echo timeout
Transfer
sequence echo
of boot code
did not reply.
21
Boot Transfer
failed
Echo error xx
Invalid transfer
sequence echo
of boot code
did not reply.
22
Internal error Failed in

Parameter save writing
error
parameter.
Normally not occurred. Replace main board.

FROM may be
defective.
23
Transfer failed Invalid year

Wrong year
data (xxxx)
xxxx
received.
SODIMM or main
board may be defective.
24
Transfer failed Invalid month

Wrong month data (xx)
xx
received.
25
Transfer failed Invalid day

Wrong date
data (xx)
xx
received.
26
Transfer failed Invalid hour

Wrong hour
data (xx)
xx
received.
27
Transfer failed Invalid minute

Wrong min
data (xx)
xx
received.
18
Rev.-01
9-28
Reconnect control
board and main
board.
Replace the cable

connecting control
board and main
board.
Replace control
board.
Replace main
board.
Reference
"4.3.4
Replacing
HEATER
CONT board
assembly"
p.4-27
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
Replace SODIMM.
p.4-26
Replace main
board.
9 Troubleshooting

No.
Message
28
Transfer not
ready
Event/
symptom
Check item
Transfer is not Check if LED display

available.
on operation panel is in
waiting status of board
manager mode.
9-29
Action
Reference
Press any button on

operation panel to make
the panel display
waiting state. Then,
reinstall the software.
"7.3
Working with
MUTOH
Maintenance
Engineer
Assistant"
p.7-8
"7.4
Working with
MUTOH
Service
Assistance"
p.7-30
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages

This section describes the symptoms of errors without an error message as well as the check items and
recovery actions.
9.3.1
Initial Operation Problems

Table 9-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems
No.
Symptom
Machine power
cannot be turned ON
Rev.-01
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Is operation panel
unit assembly cable
broken or shorted?
Replace panel cable.
"4.2.2
Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
2. Panel unit assembly

may be damaged.
Replace panel unit

assembly.
"4.2.2
Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
3. Inlet assembly may

be defective.
Replace inlet assembly.
"4.3.8
Replacing
Inlet
Assembly"
p.4-37
4. Power board
assembly may be
defective.
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
9-30
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems (Continued)
No.
2
Symptom
Abnormal LCD
operation (no
displays/garbled
characters)
Check item
1. Check panel cable for
proper connection at
operation panel unit
assembly side and
main board assembly
side.
Is the panel cable

inserted obliquely?
Is the connector
securely locked?
Action
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board: J5
assembly
Reference
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
2. Panel cable may be

damaged.
Replace panel cable.
"4.2.2
Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
3.
Replace panel board

assembly.
"4.2.2
Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9
4. Main board assembly

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
5. Power board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
Is operation panel
unit assembly LCD
damaged?
9-31
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
Check item
Initial ink charge not

available
1. Is "Sen: Cover open"

displayed on LCD
with front cover
closed?
Check connection of
cover sensor assembly
connector.

assembly.
2. Check panel cable for

proper connection at
assembly side and
main board assembly
side.
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J5
Rev.-01
Is the panel cable

inserted obliquely?
Is the connector
securely locked?
Action

assembly
Reference
"4.8.3
Replacing
Cover Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-78
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
3. Is "Sen: Lever up"

displayed on LCD
with media set lever
lowered?
Adjust lever sensor.
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.450
4. Check main board

assembly connectors
J30 for proper
connection.
Reconnect the
connector.

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
After replacement,
execute initial ink
charge from Check8:
Parameter Parameter2: Update "Update1: Head Rank"
of self-diagnosis
function.
Though initial charge

has started, ink does
not reach head.
Is spring of ink system

assembly detached or
damaged?
If the part is detached,

remount it.
If the part is damaged,

replace ink system
assembly.
Though ink reaches

head, ink is not
discharged from head.
Is capping position
appropriate?
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9-32
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
Operation
Manual
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
Check item
Ink is not discharged

though ink charge is
finished.
1. Are damper
assembly, ink tube
and SUS pipe joint
screws (K, Y, M, C)
securely tightened?
Is O-ring properly
installed?
2. Does shield part of

damper assembly
have air leak?
3. Is ink tube in ink

system assembly
bent?
4. Does pump motor

rotate during
cleaning operation?
5. When cleaning
operation is
performed, are gears
damaged or poorly
engaged?
9-33
Action
Reference
Remove head cover

and check damper
assembly.
Remove side cover (L, R)

and cartridge cover, and
check ink tube and SUS
pipe joint screws.
"4.2.1
Removing R
Side Cover"
p.4-6
"4.2.3
Removing L
Side Cover"
p.4-10
"4.2.4
Removing
Ink Holder (I/
H) Cover"
p.4-11
Replace damper
assembly and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Reconnect main board

assembly connector
J22, J23.
Replace pump motor.
Replace main board

assembly.
Replace maintenance base

assembly.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom

finished.
Check item
Action
Reference
6. When cleaning
operation is
performed, is
transmission gear
shaft damaged?

assembly.
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
7. Does ink tube have

bend, scratch, or
leak?
Replace damaged ink

tube and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow after
each replacement.
"4.10.2
Replacing
Ink Tube"
p.4-86
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Check connection of
head cable
connectors on CR
board assembly side
and head side.
Rev.-01
Reconnect head cable.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
Replace head cable.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
10. Is print head

assembly damaged?
Replace print head

assembly.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
11. Is CR board
assembly damaged?
Replace CR board
assembly.
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
Is head cable inserted

obliquely?
Is it locked securely?
9.
Is head cable
broken?
9-34
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
Check item
Action

finished.
12. Check connection of

CR cable connectors
on CR board
assembly side and
main board assembly
side.
Reconnect following
connectors.
CR board assembly
connector: J201 - J205
Machine makes no
operations after
turned ON.
After turned ON,

machine displays
"Initializing" and
resets itself.

obliquely?
Main board assembly

connector: J9 - J11
Reference
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
13. Is CR cable broken?
Replace CR cable.
"4.10.3
Replacing
CR Tape
Wire" p.4-89

may be defective.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
1. Is "Sen: Cover open"

displayed on LCD
with printer cover
closed?
Or, is cover sensor
assembly function
detected as normal
when checked
through "Sen4:
Cover" of selfdiagnosis function?
Check main board

assembly connector
J38, J40.

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.8.3
Replacing
Cover Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-78
2. Check panel cable

connectors at
assembly and main
board assembly.
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J5
Is panel cable
inserted obliquely?
9-35

assembly: J1
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
Symptom
Machine does not

perform initialization
even if media is set.
10
11
Rev.-01
Machine does not

start operation even if
front cover is closed.
Machine does not stop

even if front cover is
opened.
Check item
Action
Reference
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.5.3
Replacing
Lever
Sensor" p.449
3. Is "Set media"
displayed on LCD
with pressure arm
lowered?
Check main board

assembly connector
J30.

assembly.
4.
Is P_REAR sensor
assembly judged as
normal when
checked through
"Sen7: Rear" of selfdiagnosis function?
Check main board

assembly connector
J42.
Replace P_REAR
sensor Assembly.
5. Is DC cable assembly
connected correctly
between power board
assembly and main
board assembly?
Reconnect DC cable
assembly.
Replace DC cable
assembly.

may be defective.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
7. Power board may be

defective.
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
9-36
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.9.2
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-83
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
13
Symptom
Ink cartridge cannot
be detected even if
installed.
Operation panel
accepts no inputs.
Check item
Action
Reference
Are ink sensor and

JUNCTION board
assembly works
normally?
Follow the steps for the

message "[KCMY] No
Cartridge".
After adjustment/
replacement, execute
initial ink charge from
"Adj: Input Rank" of
8. Is specified cartridge
status detected as
normal when
checked through "Ink
Not" of selfdiagnosis function
with specified
cartridge securely
inserted?

message "Insert
specified cartridge".
After adjustment/
Check8: Parameter Parameter2: Update "Update1: Head Rank"
of self-diagnosis
function.
1. Is operation panel
cover broken or
contaminated?
Replace operation panel

cover.
2. Check panel cable

connectors at
assembly side and
main board assembly
side.
Reconnect following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J5
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Is panel cable
inserted obliquely?

assembly: J1
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
3. Operation panel unit

assembly may be
damaged.
Replace panel unit

assembly.
"4.2.2
Removing
Operation
Panel Unit"
p.4-9

may be
malfunctioning.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-37
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
14
Rev.-01
Symptom
Machine prints
nothing though it
receives data.
Check item
Refer to ""9.3.5 Online
Function Problems"
p.9-62".
9-38
Action
-
Reference
"9.3.5
Online
Function
Problems"
p.9-62
9.3.2
9 Troubleshooting
Media Feed Problems

Table 9-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems
No.
1
Symptom
Media comes off
during media set
initialization or
printing.
Media runs obliquely

or meanders during
media set
initialization or
printing.
Media crinkles during

media set
initialization or
printing.
Media jams during

media set
initialization or
printing.
Check item
Action
1. Are P_REAR sensor

assembly and
P_EDGE sensor
assembly detected as
normal when
checked through
"Sen6: Edge AD"
and Sen7: Rear of
self-diagnosis
function?
Replace P_REAR
sensor assembly and
P_EDGE sensor
assembly.
2. Is suction fan run as

normal when
checked through
"Test6: Fan" - Fan1:
Vacum Fan of selfdiagnosis function?
Check connection of
3. When pressure lever

is moved backward
and forward, does
pressure assembly
move smoothly in
synchronization with
it?
9-39
Check following
connectors.
Main board
assembly: J42, J9 J11
CR board assembly:
J208, J201 - J203
Suction fan cable

assembly: J25 - J29
Replace suction fan

assembly.
Replace cable of
suction fan that does
not operate normally.
Lubricate pressure cam.
Reference
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.10.1
Replacing
CR Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
"4.9.2
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-83
"4.6.2
Replacing
Cutter
Holder
Assembly"
p.4-61
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
"8.4
Lubrication/
Bonding"
p.8-7
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed Problems (Continued)
No.
5
Symptom
Media is torn during
media set
initialization or
printing.
Check item
Action
Reference
4. Does pressure roller

drag when pressure
lever is raised?
If pressure roller collects

media dust on itself, wipe
dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
Operation
Manual
5. Does media guide

have large distortion
or foreign objects?
Rev.-01
Machine registers
wrong media size
after media set
initialization.
If media guide collects

media dust or other
foreign objects on it,
remove them.
Replace media guide.
"4.2.8
Removing
Media Guide
R2" p.4-15
6. When using roll

media, are flanges
attached correctly?
Insert flanges correctly into

core pipe of media roll.
Operation
Manual
Is media in use a
recommended one?
Set recommended media

and check printout again.
With non-authorized
media, media sensor may
fail to detect media
correctly.
Operation
Manual
9-40
9.3.3
9 Troubleshooting
Printing Problems
Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems
No.
1
Symptom
Machine cannot print
sequentially.
Media feed after

printing is excessive.
Check item
1. printer driver may be
defective.
Action
Update printer driver.
Reference
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
2. Program ROM may be Update firmware.

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19

may be damaged.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Replace main board

assembly.
1. Is P_REAR sensor
assembly judged as
normal when checked
through "Test7: Rear"
of self-diagnosis
function?

"4.3.3
assembly connector J42. Replacing
Replace P_REAR sensor Main Board
Assembly"
assembly.
p.4-26
"4.9.2
Replacing
P_REAR
Sensor
Assembly"
p.4-83

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19

may be damaged.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-41
Replace main board

assembly.
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-9 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems (Continued)
No.
3
Symptom
Missing dots in
printing.
Check item
Action
1. Is cleaning enough?
Perform cleaning twice

consecutively.
Operation
Manual
2. Is ink tube filled with

ink?
Perform little ink charge.
Operation
Manual
3. Perform "Check4:
Adjustment" - Adj.1:
NozzleChk or
Check6: Print of
printer self-diagnosis
or "Test Print".
If the nozzle check patterns

"5.7.8 Test
are printed correctly, refer to Printing
the action in check item No. Menu" p.5-43
4.
4. Does pump motor
rotate during cleaning

operation?

"4.3.3
assembly connector J22, Replacing
J23.
Main Board
Assembly"
Replace Pump motor
p.4-26
assembly.
"4.7.1
Replace main board
Removing
assembly.
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
5. Are gears and

transmission gear shaft assembly.
damaged or poorly
engaged during
cleaning operation?
4
Nozzle plugging or ink 1. Is spring of ink system

splash is not eliminated
even after cleaning.
damaged?
2. Check cleaning wiper

condition.
Rev.-01
Reference
9-42
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66

remount it.
replace ink system
assembly.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
Wipe cleaning wiper

surface with accessory
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
Operation
Manual
If cleaning wiper is
"4.7.3
sticky with ink, replace it
Replacing
with a new one.
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-71
9 Troubleshooting
No.
4
Symptom
Check item
Nozzle plugging or ink 3. Is nozzle face wiped/

splash is not eliminated
rubbed correctly?
even after cleaning.
Action
Check wiper installation
condition and secure it
correctly.
4. Is registered head rank Enter correct head rank.

different from actual
head rank?
5. Does residual ink
collect on print head
assembly or in
nozzles?
Reference
"4.7.3
Replacing
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-71
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
Clean head as follows.

"5.7.9
1. Clean head from
HeadWash
"Check4: Adjustment" - Menu" p.5-44
Adj 9: HeadWash of
printer self-diagnosis.
"(1) Head
Rank"
p.5-57
2. Perform initial ink
charge from Check8:
Parameter Parameter2: Update "Update1: Head Rank".
3. Check printouts again.
6. Check if CR_ENC
assembly and
T fence contact with
each other.
If they contact with each

other, adjust CR_ENC
assembly and T fence
positions.
If problem remains even

after position
adjustment, replace CR
board assembly and T
fence.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
system assembly bent?
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
8. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56

may be damaged.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-43
Replace main board

assembly.
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Symptom
No printing.
Particular color is
missing.
Check item
1. Check power supply
voltage (DC24,
DC42V).
Action
Replace power board
assembly.
2. Is spring of ink system

damaged?
3.
Is CR cable inserted
obliquely?
4. CR cable may be
damaged.
Replace CR cable assembly.
5. Are damper assembly,

ink tube and SUS pipe
joint screws (K, C, M,
Y) securely tightened?
Is O-ring properly
installed?
Remove head cover and

check damper assembly.
6. Does shield part of
damper have air leak?
Replace damper
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
9-44
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70

"4.3.3
assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly
Main Board
connectors J201 - J205.
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
Rev.-01

remount it.
replace ink system
assembly.
Reference
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
"4.2.1
Remove side cover (L,
Removing
R
R) and I/H cover, and
Side
Cover"
check ink tube and SUS
p.4-6
pipe joint screws.
"4.2.3
Removing L
Side Cover"
p.4-10
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Symptom
No printing.
Particular color is
missing.
Check item
8.
Action
Does ink tube have
bend, scratch, or leak?
9. Are ink sensor and

JUNCTION board
assembly works
normally?
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.

message "[KCMY] No
Cartridge".
After adjustment/
Check8: Parameter Parameter2: Update "Update1: Head Rank"
of self-diagnosis
function.
11. Does pump motor

operation?
12. When cleaning

operation is
performed, does
transmission gear
rotate properly?
9-45
Replace damaged ink

tube and check if
cleaning operation
causes ink inflow after
each replacement.
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
Reference
"4.10.2
Replacing Ink
Tube" p.4-86
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
"4.3.3
Main Board
J23.
Assembly"
Replace Pump motor
p.4-26
assembly.
"4.7.1
Replace main board
Removing
assembly.
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66

assembly.
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
5
Symptom
No printing.
Particular color is
missing.
Rev.-01
Check item
Action
Reference
13. When cleaning

operation is
assembly.
performed, is
transmission gear shaft
damaged?
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
14. Check head cable

connectors at CR
board assembly side
and print head
assembly side.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84

obliquely?
Reconnect head cable.
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
16. CR board assembly

may be defective.
Replace CR board assembly.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-46
9 Troubleshooting
No.
6
Symptom
Machine outputs all
black printing.
Check item
Action
1. Check connection of Reconnect head cable.

head cable connectors
on CR board assembly
side and print head
side.

obliquely?
Reference
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
2. Is CR cable inserted
obliquely?

"4.3.3
assembly connectors J9 - J11 Replacing
and CR board assembly
Main Board
connectors J201 - J205.
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
3. CR cable assembly
may be damaged.
Replace CR cable assembly.
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
4. Is print head damaged? Replace damaged print head

"4.6.1
assembly.
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
7
8
9
10
may be
malfunctioning.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Blocky printing
1. Is working
quality.
environment
Blocky image printing.
appropriate?
CR line seems dotted.
White or black lines
appear.
Use machine under specified

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
9-47
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
Blocky printing
2. Have you started
quality.
printing immediately
after initial charge?
appear.
Action
Printing just after initial

Operation
charge may cause following Manual
symptoms.
Printed line blurs.
White lines appear.
In such cases, perform
cleaning two or three times
and check printout again.
If symptoms remain even
after cleaning, leave machine
unused for 1 hour or more.
Then perform cleaning again
and check printout.
If symptoms still remains,
refer to Operation Manual to
contact the technical support.
normal when checked

through Check2:
Test - Test5: Fan of
self-diagnosis
function?
Rev.-01
9-48
Reference
Check connection of
Suction fan 1 - 4
assembly: J25 - 29
Replace suction fan
assembly.
Replace cable of suction
fan that does not operate
normally.
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
Blocky printing
4. Is shielding material
quality.
secured at specified
position?
appear.
5. If the media in
problem is roll media,
does scroller rotate
evenly?
6. Is PF belt tension
adjusted to
specification?
Action
Remount it at specified
position.
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
Adjust roll receiver assembly

"4.2.9
position. Replace roll
Removing
receiver assembly.
Scroller
Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-16
Adjust PF reduction belt
tension.

condition.
Wipe cleaning wiper

surface with accessory
polynit wiper. After
wiping cleaning wiper,
perform cleaning twice
consecutively.
"(3)
Confirming
Completion of
Installation to
Printer" p.724
Operation
Manual
sticky with ink, replace it
with a new one.
8. Is nozzle face wiped/

rubbed correctly?

correctly.
9. Is T fence
contaminated?
Clean T fence.
If T fence is still
contaminated or
damaged, replace T
fence.

rotate harder when
pressure arm is raised? dust away using a wet soft
cloth.
9-49
Reference
"4.7.3
Replacing
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-71
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
Operation
Manual
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
Action
Blocky printing
11. Does pump motor
quality.
operation?

appear.
12. When cleaning

operation is
performed, does
transmission gear
rotate properly?

"4.3.3
J23.
Main Board
Assembly"
Replace pump motor
p.4-26
assembly.
"4.7.1
Removing
Replace main board
Maintenance
assembly.
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26

assembly.
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
13. When cleaning

operation is
assembly.
and transmission gear
shaft damaged?
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66

damaged?

remount it.
replace ink system
assembly.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
16. Is registered head

Enter correct head voltage.
voltage different from
actual head voltage?
Rev.-01
Reference
9-50
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
9 Troubleshooting
No.
7
8
9
10
Symptom
Check item
Blocky printing
quality.
collect on head
assembly or in
nozzles?
appear.
Action
Reference

1. Clean head through
"Adj 9: HeadWash" of
"5.7.9
self-diagnosis function. HeadWash
2. Perform initial charge Menu" p.5-44
through "Adjustment:
Voltage input".
3. Check plotouts again.
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56

may be
malfunctioning.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-51
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
11
Symptom
Printout borders blur.
Check item
Many satellites
(unnecessary dots)
Perform purge twice

consecutively.
2. Is media in use a
recommended one?
Set recommended media and

Operation
check printout again. With Manual
non-authorized media, media
sensor may fail to detect
media correctly.
3. CR cable assembly
may be damaged.
Replace CR cable assembly

wire.
Rev.-01
Operation
Manual
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
may be
malfunctioning.
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
Main board assembly Replace main board

may be damaged.
assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
1. Is working
environment
appropriate?

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
2. Is the ink level

remained sufficient?
Replace ink cartridge with

new one.
Operation
Manual
3. Perform purge three

times consecutively.
Plot out drawing again.
Operation
Manual
4. Perform test printing.
If nozzle check patterns are

plotted correctly, refer to step
(6)
5. Have you started

plottout immediately
after initial charge?
Be sure to wait 6 hours or

Operation
more after initial ink charge. Manual
Plotout before ink charge
stabilization will not provide
adequate plotting quality.
6. Is CR belt tension
adjusted to
specification?
Adjust CR belt tension.
Shaggy plotout
Uneven lines (plotted
with stains)
Reference
1. Does purge correct

symptom?
6.
12
Action
9-52
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
Symptom
Many satellites
(unnecessary dots)
Shaggy plotout
Check item
7. Check if PF_ENC
contact with each
other.

with stains)
Action

positions.
If problem remains even

after position
adjustment, replace CR
fence.

condition.
9. Is nozzle face wiped/

rubbed correctly?
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
Wipe cleaning wiper

Operation
surface with accessory Manual
cleaning wiper cleaning
cloth dampened with
small amount of purified
water. After wiping
cleaning wiper, perform
cleaning twice
consecutively.
"4.7.3
Replacing
sticky with ink, replace it Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
with a new one.
Wiper)" p.4-71

correctly.

9-53
Reference
"4.7.3
Replacing
Cleaner Head
(Cleaning
Wiper)" p.4-71
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
Symptom
Many satellites
(unnecessary dots)
Check item
Action
11. Does pump motor

operation?
Shaggy plotout

with stains)
Reference

"4.3.3
assembly connector J22 Replacing
and J23.
Main Board
Assembly"
Replace pump motor
p.4-26
assembly.
Replace main board
assembly.
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66
12. When cleaning

operation is
assembly.
and transmission gear
shaft damaged?
"4.7.1
Removing
Maintenance
Base
Assembly"
p.4-66

damaged?

remount it.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
Replace ink system

cleaning operation
causes ink inflow.

collect on print head
assembly or in
nozzles?

replace ink system
assembly.
If ink inflow is
confirmed, execute
initial ink charge.

1) Clean head from
Check4: Adjustment Adj 9: HeadWash of
printer self-diagnosis.
2) Perform initial ink
charge from Check8:
Parameter Parameter2: Update "Update1: Head Rank"
of printer self-diagnosis.
3) Check printouts again.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
"5.7.9
HeadWash
Menu" p.5-44
"5.7.5
Voltage
Adjustment"
p.5-33
16. Is print head assembly Replace damaged print head

"4.6.1
damaged?
assembly.
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
Rev.-01
9-54
9 Troubleshooting
No.
12
Symptom
Many satellites
(unnecessary dots)
Check item
Action
Reference

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
adjusted to
specification?
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
Shaggy plotout
with stains)
13
14
Mixed color lines are

not overlaid.
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
3. Is head slant
inappropriate?
Adjust head slant.
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
4. Are Bi-Directional
printing positions
aligned correctly?
Align Bi-Directional printing

"5.7.6 Unipositions.
D / Bi-D Low
and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
5. Is CW adjustment
inappropriate?
Perform CW adjustment.
Black and other colors Check if CR_ENC

do not align.
contact with each other.
9-55
"5.7.6 UniD / Bi-D Low

and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36

positions.
"4.10.1
If problem remains even Replacing CR
Board
after position
adjustment, replace CR Assembly"
p.4-84
"4.5.4
fence.
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
15
16
Symptom
Check item
Poor accuracy of
1. Is working
segment length in head
environment
travel direction (main
appropriate?
scan direction).
Poor linearity in head

scan direction
(straightness)
Action

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
adjusted to
specification?
3. Is T fence
contaminated?
Clean T fence.
If T fence is still
contaminated or
damaged, replace T
fence.
4. Internal process of
main board assembly
may be abnormal.
Initialize parameters and

reenter or modify them.
Then, check machine
operation again.
normal when checked

through Check2:
Test - Test5: Fan of
self-diagnosis
function?
2. Is PF driving pulley
loose?
Check connection of
Suction 1 - 4 cable:
J25 - J29
9-56
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
"5.11.1
Parameter
Initialization
Menu" p.5-53
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
Replace suction fan

assembly.
normally.
Replace PF motor assembly.
3. Is PF speed reduction Adjust PF speed reduction

belt tension adjusted to belt tension.
specification?
Rev.-01
Reference
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-40
"(3)
Confirming
Completion of
Installation to
Printer" p.724
9 Troubleshooting
No.
16
Symptom
Poor linearity in head
scan direction
(straightness)
Check item
Action
4. If the media in

evenly?
Adjust roll receiver

assembly position.
Replace roll receiver
assembly.

rotate harder when
cloth.
17
Poor accuracy of
segment length in
media feed direction
(sub scan direction)
Reference
"4.2.9
Removing
Scroller
Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-16
Operation
Manual
1. Is working
environment
appropriate?

"3.5
environment.
Choosing a
Place for the
Printer" p.3-6
2. Is PF driving pulley
loose?
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-40
3. Is PF belt tension
adjusted to
specification?
Adjust PF speed reduction

belt tension.
"(3)
Confirming
Completion of
Installation to
Printer" p.724

rotate harder when
cloth.
Operation
Manual
5. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated

Operation
roller partially worn
with media dust, clean roller Manual
out?
with a nylon brush.
6. Is grid roller rotation
heavy? Does rattling
occur when it rotates?
7. If the media in
evenly?
9-57
Adjust roll receiver assembly

position.
Replace roll receiver
assembly.
Change media to be used.
"4.2.9
Removing
Scroller
Receiver (L,
R)" p.4-16
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
18
19
Symptom
Check item
Action
Poor linearity in media 1. Is registered head

feed direction (media
splicing accuracy)
Poor right angle

accuracy
Rev.-01
Reference
"(1) Head
Rank" p.5-57
2. Adjust head slant.
Adjust head slant.
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
adjusted to
specification?
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
4. Are Bi-Directional
printing positions
aligned correctly?
Align two-way printing

positions.

and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
5. Is T fence
contaminated?
Clean T fence.
If T fence is still
contaminated or damaged,
replace T fence.
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
6. Check if vertical lines Replace steel bearer

plotted from Check4: assembly.
Adjustment - Adj 3:
HeadSlant are not
connected even though
nozzle check pattern
from Check4:
Adjustment - Adj 1:
NozzleChk of selfdiagnosis function is
adjusted properly.
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89
7. Is carriage assembly
loose?
Replace carriage assembly.
1. Is suction fan judged

as normal when
checked through
Test6: Fan - Fan1:
Vacum Fan of selfdiagnosis function?
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
9-58
Check connection of
following maintenance
board assembly
connectors.
Suction fan 1 - 4
assembly: J25 - J29
Replace suction fan

assembly.

normally.
9 Troubleshooting
No.
19
Symptom
Poor right angle
accuracy
Check item
Action

rotate harder when
cloth.
Reference
Operation
Manual
3. Is rough surface of grid If grid roller is contaminated

Operation
roller partially worn
out?
with a nylon brush.
9.3.4
Noise Problems
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems
No.
1
Symptom
Abnormal noise is
heard when media is
suctioned.
Check item
Action
1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and

objects or obstacles
foreign objects.
around rotating fin of
suction fan assembly?
Reference
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
2. Check damage of
If damaged, replace damaged cables and connection part.
of connectors.
3. Suction fan assembly
may be defective.
Replace suction fan

assembly.
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82

may be
malfunctioning.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.9.1
Replacing
Suction Fan
Assembly"
p.4-82
5. Power board assembly Replace power board

may be defective.
assembly.
9-59
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
No.
2
Symptom
Abnormal noise in
waiting mode
Abnormal noise is
heard while head is
moving laterally.
Check item
Action
1. Are there any foreign Remove obstacles and

objects or obstacles at foreign objects.
noise-generating
position?
Reference
-
2. Is abnormal noise
heard from board?
Replace applicable one of the

"4.3.6
following board assemblies. Replacing
Power board assembly Power Board
Assembly"
Main board assembly
p.4-31
CR board assembly
"4.3.3
Print head assembly
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
1. Does customer
recognize ink
discharge noise as
abnormal noise?
Explain machine operations. -
Additionally tighten screws.
"4.2
caused by loose screw
Removal of
in covers?
Covers" p.4-5
3.
Is rattling noise heard

when moving carriage
laterally?
heard from CR cable?
Remove dust from

carriage bearing and
roller strip.
After cleaning roller
strip, always apply thin
lubricant film over its
surface using a greasesprayed cloth.
Remove twists from CR

"4.10.3
cable.
Replacing CR
If abnormal noise sounds Tape Wire"
p.4-89
from between steel
bearer and tube guide,
replace tube guide.
Rev.-01
9-60
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-10 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems (Continued)
No.
3
Symptom
Abnormal noise is
heard while head is
moving laterally.
Abnormal noise is
heard during media
feeding.
Check item
Action
5. Does the cable
connected to CR board
assembly on carriage
contact with CR
cover?
Reference

"4.10.3
other, adjust mounting
Replacing CR
positions of the parts.
Tape Wire"
If problem remains even p.4-89
after position
adjustment, replace the
parts.
Replace it.
heard from CR driven
pulley bearing?
"4.5.5
Replacing CR
Driven Pulley
and CR belt"
p.4-53
adjusted to
specification?
"7.7 CR
Belt Tension
Adjustment"
p.7-70
heard from CR motor
assembly?
Replace CR motor assembly.
"4.5.1 CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-46
1. Is PF speed reduction
belt slipping between
PF speed reduction
pulleys?
Replace PF speed reduction

belt.
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-40
heard from PF motor
assembly?
"4.4.1
Replacing PF
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-40
3.
Is rough surface of
If grid roller is contaminated
Operation
grid roller partially
worn out?
with a nylon brush.
9-61
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
9.3.5
Online Function Problems

Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems
No.
1
Event/symptom
USB interface cannot
establish
communication.
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Does computer in use

support USB?
Windows95 does not support USB officially. If you use

Windows95, use computer
with Windows98 or higher
OS installed.
2. Does the same error

occur even if you use
another USB port on
the computer?
Use another USB port on the computer.
3. Are you using USB

hub?
Cascade connection
using USB hub is
available up to 5 stages.
If the printer operates

normally without using
USB hub, replace USB
hub.
Instruct users to use USB

hubs compliant with
USB2.0 Hi-Speed
standard.
4. Attempt
communication with
PC on hand.
Replace USB cable.
5. Does the same error

Communication error may
occur even if interface be caused by an open circuit
cable is changed?
in interface cable or too long
cable length. Instruct users to
use cables compliant with
USB2.0 Hi-Speed standard.
6. Printer driver may be

defective.
Scaling does not work

correctly.
Rev.-01

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19

may be defective.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26

defective.
Operation
Manual
9-62
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-11 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Online Function Problems (Continued)
No.
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Reference

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
Mirror function does

not work correctly.
Other functions do not 3. Main board assembly

work correctly.
may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Printing position is
incorrect.
Perform adjustment.

and High
Adjustment"
p.5-36
1. Is CW adjustment
inappropriate?
2. Is adjustment of top/ Perform adjustment.

bottom margin
distance inappropriate
between front sensor
and head and between
cutter and head?
"7.12.2
P_REAR
Sensor
Adjustment"
p.7-83

defective.
Operation
Manual

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19

may be damaged.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-63
Replace main board

assembly.
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
No.
6
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Some data are not

printed (missing).

defective.
Some data change to

garbage.

defective.
3. Is T fence
contaminated or worn
out?
Reference
Operation
Manual
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
If grease or dust collect:

Wipe fence with a dry
cloth.
If ink deposit presents:

Wipe it off with cloth
dampened with neutral
detergent.
If contamination or
deposit is too heavy:
Replace T fence.
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
Move carriage in both

directions and check the
numeral value on LCD.
If the numeral value
doesn't change normally,
check main board
assembly connector J12.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
4. Check CR Encoder
from Test5: Encoder
of Check2: Test of
self-diagnosis
function.
Replace T fence.
Replace CR motor
assembly.
Replace CR board
assembly.
Replace CR cable.
"4.5.4
Replacing T
Fence" p.4-50
"4.5.1 CR
Motor
Assembly"
p.4-46
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
"4.10.3
Replacing CR
Tape Wire"
p.4-89

may be
malfunctioning.
Rev.-01
9-64
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9 Troubleshooting
No.
8
Event/symptom
Media feed after
printout is excessive.
Check item
1. Are print start position Reinstall or update printer

and layout method set driver.
properly?
2.
9.3.6
Action
Printer driver setting

may be unsuitable.
Reference
Operation
Manual
Modify the value to an

Operation
appropriate value (Media Manual
size).

defective.
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
4.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
Main board assembly Replace main board

may be damaged.
assembly.
Other Problems
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions
No.
Event/symptom
Machine hangs up.
Check item
Action
Reference
1. Internal process of
main board assembly
may be abnormal.
Initialize parameters and

reenter or modify them.
"7.3.1
Parameter
Backup" p.710

may be damaged.
Replace main board

assembly.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-65
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

No.
Event/symptom
Check item
Machine power is shut 1. Is power cable

off during printing.
shorted?
Check by a circuit tester.
Reference
2. Is there any electric

leakage?
Check for short to chassis

ground due to damaged cable
insulation.

voltage (AC100V).
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31

voltage (DC5V).
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31

voltage (DC24V,
DC42V).
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
6. Check power board

assembly.
Replace power board

assembly.
"4.3.6
Replacing
Power Board
Assembly"
p.4-31
Ink cartridge cannot be 1. Is pointer of ink sensor Replace ink sensor assembly.
"4.8.1
inserted.
assembly deformed or
Replacing Ink
damaged?
Holder (I/H)
Assembly"
p.4-73
2. Is ink NOT sensor
(black resin lever
switch) of ink sensor
assembly damaged?
Action
Ink spills out of waste

fluid box.
Replace ink sensor assembly.
1. Check inside of waste Replace waste ink absorber

fluid box.
sheet.
"4.8.1
Replacing Ink
Holder (I/H)
Assembly"
p.4-73
-
2. Is waste fluid tube

Reinstall it.
coming out of flushing
box bent?
5
Ink spills out of

flushing box.
1. Is flushing box
clogged with dust?
Remove dust.
2. Is waste fluid tube

Reinstall waste fluid tube.
coming out of flushing
box bent?
Rev.-01
9-66
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-12 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions (Continued)

No.
Event/symptom
Check item
Action
Ink spills around X rail. 1. Extension tube may be

disconnected under ink
system assembly.
2. Ink tube may be cut.
Reference
Remove maintenance
"4.7.1
base assembly and check Removing
if extension tube is
Maintenance
connected.
Base
Assembly"
Replace pump motor
p.4-66
assembly.
Replace ink system

assembly.
Replace ink tube.
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
"4.7.2
Replacing
Maintenance
Assembly"
p.4-70
3. Print head, main board After removing ink cartridge,

"4.3.3
assembly and CR
check if each board operates Replacing
board assembly may properly.
Main Board
be defective.
Assembly"
p.4-26
"4.6.1
Replacing
Print Head"
p.4-56
"4.10.1
Replacing CR
Board
Assembly"
p.4-84
9.3.7
Troubleshooting For A Dedicated Network Software
You can use either of the following dedicated network software. Refer the directed page depending on the
software you use.
MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant
MUTOH Service Assistance
9-67
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
(1) Troubleshooting For MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant

Table 9-13 Troubleshooting for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant
No.
Symptom
Check item
Action
Reference
MUTOH Maintenance
Engineer Assistant does
not executed.
"Communication Error
(Timeout)" is displayed
while transferring data.
1. Is printer connected to Yes: Go to item (2).

"(7)
PC with LAN cable
No: Connect printer to PC Connecting
properly? (Use
properly.
Printer to PC"
crossing cable for
p.7-15
direct connection to
PC. Use straight cable
for connection routing
HUB.)
Rev.-01
Re-install the software and

"(1)
configure initial settings. Installing
MUTOH
Maintenance
Engineer
Assistant" p.711
2. Is IP address of PC
correct?
Yes: Go to item (3).

"(6) PC IP
No: Set TCP/IP property Address
in the local area settings of Setting" p.7-13
network configuration on
PC. PC and printer's sub
net address should be
specified the same
address, such as
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253.
3. Is any device which

has a same IP address
as PC or printer
connected to HUB?
Yes: Disconnect
corresponding device(s)
from the LAN.
No: Go to item (4).
4. Is printer power on
using board manager
mode and only Power
LED is ON?

No: Turn on the printer
using board manager
mode. If no string is
displayed on the LCD
panel, the Engine board
assembly is damaged or
the firmware may not be
installed (including black
out while installing
firmware).
"(8)
Starting Board
Manager
Mode" p.7-16
9-68
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-13 Troubleshooting for MUTOH Maintenance Engineer Assistant (Continued)

No.
Symptom
"Communication Error
(Timeout)" is displayed
while transferring data.
"Error is received (???):

Buffer overflow.." is
displayed.
Check item
Action
Reference
5. Is IP address of printer
correct? (Follow the
procedures in 6.3 to
confirm the
information).

using board manager
firmware).
6. Can PC communicate
with other LAN
device(s) through the
network?
Yes: Connect PC to other device(s) with LAN cable

and type ping command to
confirm the connection is
linked.
No: PC may be damaged.
Firmware file size is too

large. Confirm that the
transferred firmware is a
correct one.
Short-period buzzer
"7.3.5
sounds repeatedly and
Firmware
LCD panel displays the
Installation"
following messages while p.7-19
LEDs for Roll Paper / Cut
Paper, Color /
Monochrome flashes at
the same time.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"7.3.5
Firmware
Installation"
p.7-19
Transfer failed
Data format error
Press any key other than
Power button to stop the
buzzer sound.
Power button again to set
the printer for firmware
installation status.
4
"Transfer failed
incompatible F/W" is
displayed while
transferring a appropriate
firmware.
A MAIN board assembly

with the firmware of other
printer is equipped to the
printer. Confirm the DIP
SW setting on the board.
9-69
Install the firmware while

setting the DIP SW (SW32) on the board to ON. Set
the SW to OFF after the
installation.
"(1)
Setting DIP
SW on MAIN
board
assembly" p.719
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
(2) Troubleshooting For MUTOH Service Assistance

Table 9-14 Troubleshooting For MUTOH Service Assistance
No.
Symptom
Check Item
Action
Reference
MUTOH Maintenance
Engineer Assistant does
not executed.
"Packet communication
error" is displayed while
transferring data.
1. Is printer connected to Yes: Go to item (2).

"(7)
PC with LAN cable
No: Connect printer to PC Connecting
properly? (Use
properly.
Printer to PC"
crossing cable for
p.7-15
direct connection to
PC. Use straight cable
for connection routing
HUB.)
Rev.-01
Re-install the software and

"(1)
configure initial settings. Installing
MUTOH
Service
Assistance"
p.7-31
2. Is IP address of PC
correct?

No: Set TCP/IP property
in the local area settings of
network configuration on
PC. PC and printer's sub
net address should be
specified the same
address, such as
192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253.
"(5)
Confirming IP
Address of the
Printer" p.712
3. Is any device which

has a same IP address
as PC or printer
connected to HUB?
Yes: Disconnect
corresponding device(s)
from the LAN.
No: Go to item (4).
4. Is printer power on
using board manager
mode and only Power
LED is ON?

using board manager
firmware).
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
"7.4.7
Updating Main
Firmware"
p.7-47
5. Is IP address of printer
correct? (Follow the
procedures in 6.3 to
confirm the
information).

No: Engine board
assembly may be
damaged.
"4.3.3
Replacing
Main Board
Assembly"
p.4-26
9-70
9 Troubleshooting
Table 9-14 Troubleshooting For MUTOH Service Assistance (Continued)

No.
Symptom
Check Item
Action
Reference
"Packet communication
error" is displayed while
transferring data.
6. Can PC communicate
with other LAN
device(s) through the
network?
Yes: Connect PC to other device(s) with LAN cable

and type ping command to
confirm the connection is
linked.
No: PC may be damaged.
"Error is received (???):

Buffer overflow.." is
displayed.
Firmware file size is too

large. Confirm that the
transferred firmware is a
correct one.
Short-period buzzer
"7.4.7
sounds repeatedly and
Updating Main
LCD panel displays the
Firmware"
following messages while p.7-47
LEDs for Roll Paper / Cut
Paper, Color /
Monochrome flashes at
the same time.
Transfer failed
Data format error
Power button to stop the
buzzer sound.
Power button again to set
the printer for firmware
installation status.
9-71
Rev.-01
9 Troubleshooting
Rev.-01
9-72
10 Appendix
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 10- 2
10.2 Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 10- 2
10.3 Maintenance Part List........................................................................... 10- 2
10.4 Jigs and Tools....................................................................................... 10- 8
10.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................. 10-8
10.5 Operation Panel Messages (Bilingual List) ........................................ 10- 9
10.6 Exploded View....................................................................................... 10- 9
10-1
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides referential information such as service data and exploded views.
10.2 Wiring Diagram

For wiring diagram, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet Wiring Diagram p.1
10.3 Maintenance Part List

Table 10-1 Maintenance Part List
Section name
Carriage
assembly
Rev.-01
Part name
Part number
Remarks
DF-42234
Common with RJ-900 series
Damper assembly
DF-46678
P_EDGE assembly
DF-48983
CR_ENC assembly
DF-48986
PG origin sensor terminal

assembly
DF-49001
Solenoid terminal assembly
DF-49003
Head cable assembly
DF-49017

Two assemblies required for
total replacement.
Head FG assembly
DF-49018
Head tube K (VJ) assembly
DG-40375
Head tube C (VJ) assembly
DG-40376
Head tube Y (VJ) assembly
DG-40377
Head tube M1 (VJ) assembly
DG-40378
Head tube M2 (VJ) assembly
DG-40379
Solenoid spring assembly
DF-49062
Roller arm assembly
DF-49065
CR board assembly
DF-49659
Common with VJ-16
Print head assembly
DF-49684
Common with VJ-16
10-2
10 Appendix
Table 10-1 Maintenance Part List (Continued)

Section name
Carriage
assembly
CR assembly
PF assembly
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Carriage assembly
DF-49685
Three-way joint 2-2x2
DF-49688
CR_HP sensor, Lever sensor
DF-49471
CR motor cable A0 assembly
DF-48992
CR origin sensor cable

assembly
DF-49000
Lever sensor cable assembly
DF-49004
CR cable assembly (VJ13)
DG-41143
Three assemblies required for

total replacement.
CR motor assembly
DF-49021
T fence assembly (VJ13)
DG-41140
T fence spring assembly
DF-49026
Fence guide assembly
DF-49027
Tube guide assembly (VJ13)
DG-41141
Steel bearer assembly (VJ13)
DG-41142
CR belt assembly (VJ13)
DG-41139
CR driven pulley assembly
DF-49047
DF-49471
Pressure spring
DF-49691
DF-49052
Pressure roller assembly
DF-49053
Pressure roller axis
DF-49054
Tube clamp
DF-49694
Five assemblies required for

total replacement.
CR tube (VJ13)
DG-41150

assembly
DG-40135
CNT to JC cable assembly
DG-40136
PF encoder assembly (VJ13)
DG-41138
PF motor cable A0 assembly
DF-48990
PF motor assembly
DF-49020
Common with RJ-900 and VJ

series
10-3
Rev.-01
10 Appendix

Section name
PF assembly
Frame assembly
Media guide
assembly
Cartridge
assembly
Rev.-01
Part name
Part number
Remarks
PF_ENC scale assembly
DF-49028
X speed reduction belt

assembly
DF-49046
Speed reduction pulley

assembly
DF-49051
Suction fan
DF-46328

Including one set
Suction fan cable 1 assembly
DF-48994
DF-48995
DF-48996
DF-48997
Lock arm assembly
DF-49059
Lock arm spring assembly
DF-49060
Arm shaft assembly
DF-49061
Thermistor assembly
DF-46639
DF-48982
Pre-heater, 100
DF-49695
Platen heater, 100
DF-49696

total replacement.
PLT_H1 cable assembly
DF-49675
DF-49676
PRE_H cable assembly
DF-49677
AFT_H cable assembly
DF-49678
PLT_T1 cable assembly
DF-49679
DF-49680
PRE_T cable assembly
DF-49681
AFT_T cable assembly
DF-49682
Holder Pressure spring
DF-43967

total replacement.
(One piece is inside the
package.)
INK ID board assembly
DF-43968
Frame assembly, hook
DF-46700
10-4
10 Appendix

Section name
Cartridge
assembly
Maintenance
assembly
Cover assembly
Board assembly
Part name
Part number
Remarks
INK cable assembly
DG-40138
One piece inside
O-ring, M6
DF-46671
Pump motor cable assembly
DF-48993
Wiper origin cable assembly
DF-49002
(VJ13)
DG-41149
DF-49687
Cap head assembly
DG-41179
Panel unit assembly
DF-48977
Common with RJ-900 and VJ

series
Cover R sensor assembly
DF-49011
Cover L sensor A0 assembly
DF-49013
Panel cable assembly
DF-49014

assembly
DF-49056

Six assemblies required for
total replacement.
Sensor cover L assembly
DF-49057
Sensor cover R assembly
DF-49058
Scroller receiver roller

assembly (VJ13)
DG-41135
Three assemblies required for

one side replacement. (One
piece is inside the package.)
Roll receiver R assembly

(VJ13)
DG-41137
Roll receiver L assembly

(VJ13)
DG-41136
VJ panel sheet
DG-40170
Common with VJ series
AC inlet
DF-46652
DF-48975
Cooling fan cable A0

assembly
DF-48999
Noise filter FG assembly
DF-49019
DF-49022
Cooling fan assembly
DF-49023
10-5
Rev.-01
10 Appendix

Section name
Board assembly
Accessory
assembly
Rev.-01
Part name
Part number
Remarks
MAIN board assembly
DF-49658
HEATER CONT board2

assembly
DG-41105
HEATER RELAY board

assembly
DF-49661
Noise filter to Fuse AC cable

assembly
DF-49663
Fuse to Terminal Stand AC

cable
DF-49664
Terminal Stand to MAIN AC

cable
DF-49665
DC cable assembly
DF-49666
Terminal Stand to CNT AC

cable
DF-49667
CNT to RLY AC cable

assembly
DF-49668
CNT to RLY tape wire
DF-49669
RLY_AC cable assembly
DF-49670
MAIN to CNT serial cable

assembly
DF-49672
Fuse
DF-49683
MAIN to CNT cable

assembly
DG-40137
SODIMM 128MB assembly
DF-49715
Cooling fan cable RLY

assembly
DG-40530
Leg assembly (VJ13)
DG-41145
Caster with a lock assembly
DF-49070
Free caster assembly
DF-49071
Leg screw set assembly
DF-49080
Waste fluid bottle assembly
DF-47867
Waste fluid level swtich

(VJ16)
DG-41091
Common with VJ-1604 and

VJ-1608
Power AC cable 15A (for

VJ13 US)
DG-41147
10-6
10 Appendix

Section name
Part name
Part number
Remarks
Accessory
assembly
Power AC cable 10A (for

VJ13 Europe)
DG-41148
Others
VJ13 periodical maintenance

kit
DG-41152
CR belt clip
DG-41144
Fixing the CR belt while

shipping
VJ take up motor assembly
DG-40471
Common with VJ16
Drive roller
DG-40472
Common with VJ16
Holder roller
DG-40473
Common with VJ16
Holder roller L
DG-40474
Common with VJ16
Drive collar
DG-40475
Common with VJ16
VJ take up scroller 13
TBD
DF-49471
Common with VJ16
VJ take up CNT board

assembly
DG-40478
Common with VJ16
Power source (for foreign

use)
DF-44506
Common with RJ-8000
VJ take up SW board
assembly
DG-40479
Common with VJ16
W_ON sensor assembly
DG-40480
Common with VJ16
W_OFF sensor assembly
DG-40481
Common with VJ16
AC cable assembly
DG-40482
Common with VJ16
DC cable assembly
DG-40483
Common with VJ16
Power cable 10A (for U.S.

use)
DG-40484
Common with VJ16
Take Up Unit
Assembly
10-7
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
10.4 Jigs and Tools

This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations.
10.4.1 Required Tools

(1) Tools for Part Replacement
Table 10-2 Tools for Part Replacement
No.
Name
Part number
Remarks
Phillips driver No.2
Generic product
More than 250mm shaft length is

recommended
Generic product
Less than 50mm shaft length is

recommended
Generic product
Flat-head driver
Generic product
Longnose plier
Generic product
Tweezers
Generic product
Hex wrench (opposite side:

6mm)
Optional stand
accessory (Generic
product)
Required only when disassembling legs
Tube cutter
Generic product
Required when cutting the tube
(2) Tools for Adjustment

Table 10-3 Tools for Adjustment
No.
Name
Part number
Remarks
Personal computer
Generic product
Tension gauge
Generic product
Max. 10,000gf (100N) for measurement
Tension gauge
Generic product
Max. 5,000gf (50N) for measurement
MF-3G
Exclusive use media Used for media sensor adjustment

(P_REAR sensor and P_EDGE sensor) and
for print accuracy adjustment
Straight scale (1000mm)
Generic product
Jig cutter holder (VJ)
JD-42804
PG height check tool (VJ13)
JD-42806
Rev.-01
10-8
10 Appendix
10.5 Operation Panel Messages (Bilingual List)

TIP
"2.4.5 Selecting Panel Language and Panel Temperature" p.2-12
10.6 Exploded View

For exploded views and the maintenance parts, see information below.
TIP
Separate sheet Exploded View p.2-p.10
10-9
Rev.-01
10 Appendix
Rev.-01
10-10
VJ-1304E Maintenance Manual
Supplement Electric Wiring Diagram
Electric Wiring Diagram

DF-49016 CR tape wire A0
DF-48977
Panel unit assembly
J16
J12
J32
J5
J201
M_INK
PF_ENC
FAN1
PANEL
TO CR
J15
J17
C_INK
Y_INK
J42
P_REAR_SENS
FAN3
J203
TO CR
J202
TO CR
TO CR
J201
J206
CUTER SOLENOID
DF-48995 Suction fan cable 2

assembly
Suction fan2

assembly
Suction fan3

assembly
Suction fan4
J45
DF-48975
DF-49682 AFT_T cable assembly
MAIN BOARD DE-22158
InkSlot 5
InkSlot 6
EXT AC-OUT
J23
J22
AC-IN
J20
DG-40135
J3
AC-OUT
GPM@@@@@@
REV H-1
REV L-1
REV H-2
REV L-2
REV H-3
REV L-3
REV H-4
REV L-4
REV H-5
REV L-5
REV H-6
REV L-6
RELAY B
RELAY A
J12
SMART CARD
J25
J2
EXIT DCOUT DC POW
J17
J19
J21
J23
EXTACT1 EXTACT2 EXTACT3 EXTACT4
J18
J20
J23
J24
EXTSLOT1
EXTSLOT2
EXTSLOT3
EXTSLOT4
DF-49668 CNT to RLY AC cable assembly

DG-40136 CNT to JC cable assembly
DF-49667 Terminal Stand to CNT AC cable assembly
DF-49672 MAIN to CNT serial cable assembly
J3
to CONT
RY4
J2
Platen heater R
* Alphabet and numbers before part name stand for the maintenance part number.
RY7
Platen heater L
J7
J8
J5
PLT_HT2
PLT_HT1
J11
DEBUG
RY9
RY2
DG-41105
HEATER CONT board 2 assembly
to CONT
J10
COOLING_FAN
PRE_HT2
J9
AFT_HT
PRE_HT1
Preheater L Preheater R
DF-49678 AFT_H cable assembly
InkSlot 4
J11
MIST_FAN 1,2
J6
InkSlot 3
ON
SW1
J4
InkSlot 2
4 3 2 1
J14
MIST_FAN 3,4
J12
PLT_1
Preheater thermistor assembly
RY6
AC_OUT
InkSlot 1
RESET SW
J13
PLT_2
DF-49676 PLT_H2 cable

assembly
J10
J15
PRI_1
J1
J9
J16
PRI_2
AC_IN
J8
J17
AFT_1
DF-49670 RLY_AC cable assembly
J7
J18
AFT_2
DF-49661
HEATER RELAY board assembly
GPO@@@@@@
J6
J19
REV_1
DF-49675 PLT_H1 cable assembly
SubTank 6
J5
J19
J16
SubTank 5
DC-IN
J15
SubTank 4
DF-49669 CNT to RLY tape wire
TO MAIN
TO JUNCTION
LD2(Red)
LD1(Green)
JUNCTIO POW
J8
J21
HEATER JUNCTION BOARD DE-36763

J13
J2
FEED-M
SEND-S
GPN@@@@@@
J14
SubTank 3
J4
WIND-M
J3
POW-ON
DG-40138 INK cable assembly (VJ12)
J5
WIND-S
HEATER CONTROL BOARD

DE-36761
J12
SubTank 2
J20
REV_2
J6
J11
SubTank 1
Platen heater thermistor assembly
DF-49681 PRE_T cable assembly
J6
CartridgeENDsonser
DG-40137 MAIN to CNT cable assembly
DF-49672 MAIN to CNT serial cable assembly
CartridgeNOTsensor
Platen heater thermistor assembly
DF-49679 PLT_T1 cable assembly
DF-49666 DC cable assembly
ID sensor board
After heater thermistor assembly
DF-49680 PLT_T2 cable assembly
Post header
J22
PUMP1
Suction fan1
BLOWER
FAN1
PUMP2
J23
J26
Pump motor

assembly
J28
BLOWER
FAN3
J29
J6
J13
J46
J1
BT1
TO CONT_PS
SW4
RJ-45
USB IF
POWER SUPPLY
BLOWER BLOWER
FAN2
FAN4
DF-49658
MAIN board
R373
DF-48993 Pump motor cable

assembly
J25
J3
SDDIM CONNECTOR
CR motor
CN001
J20
PF_MOTER
SW4
J43
R371
R385
PG ORIGIN
DF-48992 CR motor cable A0

assembly
DG-40530 Cooling fan cable RLY assembly
SW3
SERIAL REV
R361
J208
2
1
128MB SODIMM
COVER_R
PF motor
DF-48990 PF motor cable A0 assembly
F7
TO CR
LEVER_SENS
DF-49011 Cover R sensor assembly
J209
J207
F6
J203
ON
J36
J38
Cover R
sensor
J40
COVER_L
AC_IN2
J35
WEST_SENS L
Terminal block
DF-49677 PRE_H cable

assembly
J27
WIPE_ORG
DF-49004 Lever sensor cable

assembly
250V 15A
assembly
WEST_SENS R
DF-49664 Fuse to Terminal Stand AC cable assembly
DF-49018 Head FG assembly
DG-40529 PRE_H2 cable
CR_ORG
RJ-350
CR BOARD
DE-36547
CN301
DF-49002 Wiper origin cable

assembly
J33
Print head
J204
to HEAD CN1
J202
TO CR
J36
J21
Lever sensor
J14
J24
J205
to HEAD CN2
Fuse
CR_MOTER
Wiper origin
sensor
DF-49000 CR origin sensor cable

assembly
inlet
250V 15A
K_INK
J41
DEBUG PORT
CR origin
sensor
DG-41091 Waste fluid level switch

assembly (VJ16)
DF-49001 PG origin sensor terminal

assembly
PG Origin sensor
DF-49019 Noise filter FG assembly

DF-49017 Head cable assembly
DF-49667 Terminal Stand to CNT AC cable
DF-49013 Cover L sensor A0 assembly
Cover R sensor
DF-48986 CR_ENC assembly
CR encoder
DF-49663 Noise filter to Fuse AC cable
DF-49665 Terminal Stand to MAIN AC cable
DF-48982 P_REAR sensor assembly
P_PEAR sensor
DF-48983 P_EDGE assembly
P edge sensor
CR ENCORDER PAPER EDGE
DG-41138 PF encoder assembly
PF encoder
Waste fluid
sensor
DF-49014 Panel cable

assembly
DF-49023 Cooling fan (5V) assembly
Cooling fan(5V)
Headlock solenoid
TO MISC
Cooling fan(24V)
DF-49659
CR board assembly
DF-49003 Solenoid terminal assembly
DF-48999 Cooling fan cable A0 assembly
DE-36765
HEATER RERAY BOARD
Post header
After heater L/R
2007.08.20 Rev.A
AC
DC
+5V
+12V
+24V
+42V
Electric Wiring Diagram

Model Name: VJ-1304E
Supplement Carriage Assy1
Carriage Assy1
Exploded View
Lock kicker
DE-36579
Round head spring screw M3 x 8

MS-05030081
Height switching flag

DF-48668
E type fixing ring E-3

MS-8003000A
Cap
DF-49501
CR tape wire protective material

DF-49383
Height adjusting cam

DE-36570
Cutter solenoid spring BA

TB-40155
Height switching lever

DE-36571
Cutter solenoid assembly (PE)

DE-34142
Solenoid spring assembly

DF-49062

DF-42234
Round head spring screw M3x8
MS-05030081
Height switching cam

DE-36581
Height switching lever spring

DF-48673
Flat cable clip

E-A-1
P tight cup M3x6
MS-59030061
Damper holder
DE-22163
P-EDGE sensor assembly

DF-48630

MS-05030081
P_EDGE assembly
DF-48983
Cursor shaft C BA
TB-40003
Cursor
DE-12573
Pinch roller spacer BA

TB-40059
Cursor roller shaft V
TB-49142
Bearing 684ZZ
DF-48917
Head pushing spring rubber

DG-40364
Solenoid relay assembly

DF-49003
P-EDGEmounting plate
DE-36597
Bearing 684ZZ
DF-48917
Photo interrupter
E-SG2481
Cutter solenoid relay assembly

DE-48781
Cutter holder
DE-12578
SE ring SE-3
MS-8403000A
CR_HP sensor and lever sensor

DF-49471
Post header assembly

E-29156-2
Cutter holder cap

DE-36768
Height switching shaft

DF-48667
Pinch roller spacer BA

TB-40059
Height adjusting cam
DE-36570
Head unit pushing spring

DE-36582
Plain washer M3
MS-8703000A
MS-05030081
Backing-plate receiver spring Height switching cam

DF-48672
DE-36581
Head pressure plate

DE-12575
Head pushing spring
DF-48674
Carriage plate spring

DG-40301
Head holding piece

DE-36576
MS-0503006A
Carriage assembly
DF-49685
Joint screw M6
DF-49778
Hexagon bearing
DF-48666
Backing-plate receiver
Blast adjusting piece DE-22228
DE-36772
Cursor roller spring
DF-48671
Roller shaft_l
DF-48665
E stopper ring E-3

MS-8003000A
Roller arm
DE-36568
Bearing 684ZZ
DF-48917
Binding head small screw M3x5

MS-1103005C
SE ring SE-3
MS-8403000A
O-ring M6
butyl rubber
DF-46476

MS-0503006A
Damper assembly
DF-42110
Carriage plate spring

Head FG plate
DG-40301
DE-36575
Blast adjuster retaining spring L

DG-40188
Head frame spring 8.9
DG-40168
Head FG cable assembly

DF-48782
O-ringbutyl rubber
DF-46390
Head FG_assembly
DF-49018
Damper assembly
DF-46678
Blast adjuster retaining spring R

DG-40189
Head pushing plate spring 2
DG-40166
Backing-plate receiver
DE-36572
Slant adjusting plate
DE-22162
Tapping screw M36 S tight cup

MS-5203006A
Print head
DF-49485

MS-0503006A
Print head
DF-49684
Head tap wire
DF-48619
Head cable assembly
DF-49017
Two assemblies required for total replacement.
Roller arm assembly

DF-49065
Tapping screw M3 x 6 S tight cup

MS-5203006A
Head pushing plate spring

DF-49141
Head protective material
DE-36769
Absorber H
DF-49136
Head mounting plate

DE-12574
Head adjusting cam

DE-36573

MS-05030081
Carriage Assy1
2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement Carriage Assy2
Carriage Assy2
Exploded View
Part No.
Remarks
CR board cover
DE-22166
Tube(s) used
*GCFVWDG-
8,&).OO
*GCFVWDG%
8,&).OO
*GCFVWDG;
8,&).OO
*GCFVWDG/
8,&).OO
*GCFVWDG/
8,&).OO
Head tube K(VJ)AssyDG-40375
Head tube C(VJ)AssyDG-40376
Head tube Y(VJ)Assy DG-40377
Head tube M1(VJ)AssyDG-40378
Head tube M2(VJ)AssyDG-40379
Cut ink tube (2.0Bk) DE-49738 at a length

you want and use.
Tapping screw M3x8

S tight cup
MS-5203008A
Bearer fixing material

DF-48670
Head tube length list

Part name
P tight cupM3x8
MS-59030081
Tapping screw M3x8

S tight cup
MS-5203008A
Joint screw M6
DF-49778
Tapping screw M3x8

S tight cup
MS-5203008A
Head cable assembly

DF-49017
Two assemlies required
for total replacement.
EMI holder
DF-49491

DE-22164
CR board assembly
DE-36800
Head tap wire

DF-48619
O ring M6
butyl rubber
DF-46476

DE-36785
Tapping screw M3x8

S tight cup
MS-5203008A
CR board assembly
DF-49659
To Print Head
Tube fixing material VJ

DE-36578

DF-49688
Tube holding rubber
DF-49326
Three-way joint lid

DF-49590
Insulation film
DF-48682

MS-05030061
O ring M6
butyl rubber
DF-46476
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Joint screw M6
DF-49778
MS-05030081
Cable cover L
DE-22165
Head FG cable assembly

DF-48782
CR base
DE-12576
Head FG_assembly
DF-49018
PG origin sensor terminal assembly

DF-48635
PG origin sensor terminal assembly
DF-49001
Edge saddle
(EDS-1208U)
E-EDS-1208U
MS-05020061

MS-05030081
CR encoder assembly
DF-48633
CR_ENC Assy
DF-48986
Tapping screw M3x8
S tight cup
MS-5203008A
CR_ENC mounting plate

DF-48669
Cable cover R
DE-12577

MS-05030081
Carriage Assy2
2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement CR Assy1
CR Assy1
Exploded View
Cup screw M4x8 Ni-3
MS-06040081
CR driven pulley shaft

DE-48592
CR motor mounting plate
DE-22297
Tapping screw M4x10

S tight cup
MS-5204010A
Bearing 684ZZ
DF-48917
Tension adjusting plate

DF-48600
Bearing holder
DF-48594
Stop rubber BA
TB-40010
T fense spring (VJ)
CR driven pulley
DF-48593
DG-40261
T fense spring assembly
DF-49026
Round head
spring screw M48
Tension fixing spring

DE-36555

DF-48992
Y rail eccentric screw

DF-48585
T fense rubber
DG-40305
Pressure locating material L

DE-36529
CR belt (VJ1304)
DE-37140
CR belt assembly (VJ13)
DG-41139
Pressure locating material L2

DG-40689
Flanged hexagon nut M4

with Serrate
MS-9704000A
Y rail mounting material R
DE-36528
Tapping screw
M4x8 S Tight cup
MS-5204008A
CR belt clip
DE-37133
* Use only when
transferring printer.
T fence (VJ1304)
DE-22350
CR belt clip
DG-41144
T fense assembly (VJ13)

DG-41140
Round head
spring screw M4x8
MS-0504008A
Cup screw M3x6

Zn-CM2
MS-0603006A
Pressure locating material R2

DE-37139
E type fixing ring M8

MS-8708000A

DF-48623
Edge saddle
E-EDS-1208U
Round head spring screw M48

MS-0504008A
MS-0504008A
CR motor assembly
DF-49021
Heater junction board assembly

DG-40135
CNT to JC power cable assembly

DF-49891
Pan head small screw M4x30

MS-0104030A
Y rail mounting material L

DE-36530
HEATER JUNCTION board assembly

DE-36762
CNT to JC power cable assembly

DG-40136
Driven pulley base

DE-36554
CR driven pulley assembly

DF-49047

with serrate
MS-9704000A
CR motor assembly
DE-36535
CR belt spring
DF-48595
Clamp2 SV0
DF-47183
Tapping screw M36

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
CRT board bracket

DE-36887
Pressure locating material R

DE-36553
Y rail eccentric screw

DF-48585
Y rail assembly (VJ1304)

DE-37134
Plain washer (Finishing ) M8

MS-8708000A
Y rail mounting material L2
DF-48586
Roller guide (VJ1304)
DE-37137
Fence guide
DE-36540
Fence guide
DF-49027
Pressure bracket
DE-22141
Pressure cam
DF-48581
Pressure roller
DF-48583
Y rail side plate R

DE-36525
Pressure spring 6.9N
DG-40139
Pressure spring DF-49691
Pressure roller assembly

DF-49053
Pressure roller shaft

DF-48584
Pressure roller shaft assembly
DF-49054
Pressure arm
DE-22142
DF-49052
CR origin sensor cable assembly

DF-48634
Pressure bush 13
DF-47446
CR origin sensor cable assembly

DF-49000
Pressure arm shaft (VJ1304)

DE-37138
Photo interrupter
E-SG2481

DF-48639
CR_HPsensor, Lever sensor

DF-49471

DF-49004
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558
Photo interrupter
E-SG2481
Tapping screw M4x10

S tight cup
MS-5204010A
CR_HP sensor, Lever sensor

DF-49471
Pressure lever spring
DF-48587
Pressure lever
DE-12558
CR Assy 1
E-ring E-6
MS-800600A
2007.12.25 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement CR Assy2
CR Assy2
Exploded View
Tube holder
DE-36539
Head tube length list

Part name
Ink Tube VJ-Bk
Ink Tube VJ-C
Ink Tube VJ-M
Ink Tube VJ-Y
Part No.
Remarks
DG-40698 2L=1953mm
DF-40699 2L=1913mm
DF-40700 2L=1883mm
DF-40701 2L=1813mm
Tube(s) used
1
1
1
1
Ink tube (2.0Bk)DE-49738

After cut
Ink tube VJ-Bk (VJ1304)DG-40698
Ink tube VJ-C (VJ1304) DG-40699
Ink tube VJ-M (VJ1304) DG-40700
Ink tube VJ-Y (VJ1304) DG-40701
Bearer cushion
DF-49503

MS-0503006A
Tube holder
DE-36539
Shield plate
DE-36953
CR tube (VJ13)DG-41150
Electrically conductive cloth tape (VJ1304)

DG-40965
Tapping screw M3x6 S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Steel bearer (VJ1304)

DE-37135
Tube clamp
DE-36786
Tube clapm DF-49694
5 clamps are required for entire
replacement.
CR tape wire (VJ1304)

DF-40694
Steel bearer assembly(VJ13) DG-41142
Tube guide film (VJ1304)

DE-22351
Tube guide assembly (VJ13)DG-41141
Cable guide (VJ1304)

DE-37141
CR cable assembly (VJ13) DG-41143

3 assemblies are required for entire replacement.

MS-5203006A
Flat clamp FCR35

E-FCR-35-V0
CR Assy 2
2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement PF Assy
PF Assy
Exploded View
Round Head Spring Screw M3x8

MS-0503008A
Tapping Screw M3x8

P Tight Cup
MS-5903008A
Speed reduction pulley assembly

DF-49051
ENC holder
DF-48550

MS-5203006A
Bearing holder
DF-48547
PF_ENC scale
DE-36501
Round Head Spring ScrewM4x8
MS-0504008A
Speed reduction pulley

DE-36500
PF_ENC scale assembly

DF-49028
Hexagon socket pan flat head (Finishing)

M3x16 Ni-3
MS-35030161
Eccentric spacer
DG-41034
Bearing
DF-48546
Pulley holder
DF-49456
Tapping Screw M3x6

S Tight Cup
MS-5203006A
Bearing (5-11)
DG-41035
Timing belt
DF-48551
Round Head Spring Screw

(Finishing)
M2x6 Ni-3
MS-05020061
Slit guide
TB-30235
PF bracket (VJ1304)
DE-37156
C-ring (jig) JG-20

MS-8220000A
XSpeed Reduction Belt assembly
DF-49046
E type fixing ring E-3
Clamp RMS-1VO
MS-8003000A
DF-48558
DE-22356
Grid holder
DG-40907
Bearing (4-11
DG-40922
Round Head Spring Screw M3x6

MS-0503006A
PF box
Round Head Spring Screw
M3x8 Ni-3
MS-05030081
Spacer (3.2x6xt2.5)
DG-40385
PF motor 2
DE-36625
MS-05030081
PF motor assembly
DF-49020
Grid rollerVJ1304
DE-22349
Hexagon socket pan flat head

M36 Ni-3
MS-35030061
PF encoder
assembly (VJ1304)
DG-40697
PFmotor cable A0 assembly

Assy DF-48621
PF encoder assembly (VJ13)

DG-41138
PF motor cable A0_assembly

DF-48990
Grit medium tray_VJ

DF-49712
Grit medium tray stay_VJ

DF-49711
Tapping Screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
PF encoder mounting plate t2

DF-49510
Round head screw (Small) M310
MS-04030101
Spacer (3.2x6xt2.5)
DG-40385
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558
Cursor roller
DF-44197
Free bush 2
DF-49433
Tapping screw M4x8

S tight cup
MS-5204008A

MS-0503008A
Sliding bearing
DF-48545
PF cover
DE-12571
Intermediate support VJ
DF-49713
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Cover L fixing material

DF-37144
Tapping Screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Frame Assy
PF Fixing Plate
DE-22353
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
PF Assy
2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement Frame Assy
Frame Assy
Exploded View
T Frame L
DE-22153
F Frame L (VJ1304)
DE-37221

MS-5203006A
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558

MS-5204006A
Tapping Screw M3x6 S Tight Cup
MS-5203006A
Edge saddle (EDS-1208U)

E-EDS-1208U
PF Motor Cover
DE-37264
Square bush
DG-40167
T Frame R
DE-22154
Free bush 2
DF-49433
Rubber leg
DF-48567
F Frame R
DE-22152
Round Head Screw

(Finishing) M4x20
MS-0304020A
Tapping Screw M4x6

S Tight Cup
MS-5204006A
Free bush 1
DF-49432
Tapping Screw M4x6
S Tight Cup
MS-5204006A
R Frame B
DE-22155
Frame seal
DF-48698

DF-48628
Frame (VJ)
DE-12729
E Stopper Ring E-2

MS-8002000A
Shaft DF-49133
Suction fan cable 4 assemblyDF-48997

Handle t1.6
DF-48565

DF-48627
Lock arm 2 DE-36654

DF-48626

DF-48625
FFC seal
DF-48722
Lock arm assembly DF-49059

Lock arm spring DF-48563
Handle t1.6
Suction fan cable 1 assemblyDF-48994 DF-48565
Lock arm spring assembly DF-49060
Pan Head Small Screw M4x5

MS-01040051
Rubber leg
DF-48567
Fan duct
DE-35167
Mini Clamp (MN-2)
DE-36571
Pan Head Small Screw M4x8
MS-0104008A
Arm shaft assembly DF-49061
Lock bracket
DF-49134
Tapping Screw M3x6 S Tight Cup
MS-5203006A
Round Head Spring Screw (Finishing)

M4x40MS-0504040A
Suction FAN
DE-35166
Suction fanDF-46328
Total: 4 parts
Round Head Screw

(Finishing) M4x20
MS-0304020A
Suction FAN mounting plate

DE-36788
Frame Assy
Tapping Screw M3x6 S Tight cup

MS-5203006
2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model Name : VJ-1304
Supplement Media guide Assy
Media guide Assy

Exploded View
PRE_T cable assemblyDF-49681
Thermistor assemblyDF-46639
PRE_Tcable assembly
DF-49640
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Media guide R1(A0)

DE-36777
Media guide R2(A0)

DE-12725
Thermistor assembly
EA-47711
Thermistor holder
DF-46468
MS-0503005A
PRE_H cable assembly

DF-49677
Cup screw M36

MS-0603006A
PRE_H sensor plate Cup screw M2x6

DF-49636
MS-06020061
PE sensor plate
DF-48561
Platen fixing screw NX
DF-43224
Cup screw M3x6
MS-0603006C
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A

DF-48629
DF-48982
Wave washer 6 BA
TB-40125
Media guide F right cover

DE-36783
Media guide support

DE-36782
PGR stay_b
DE-22278
Cup screw M36

MS-0603006A
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Aluminium patch (PP)

DG-40387
Platen fixing screw
DF-46590
Platen heater (100)

DE-36791
Cup screw M3x6

MS-0603006C
Aluminium patch (Large)

DG-40244
Cup screw M36

MS-0603006A
Media guide F upper

DE-12723
Heat insulator platen (100)

DF-49618
Platen fixing screw NX
DF-43224
Media guide stay a

DE-12721
Pre_platen heater assemlby (VJ1204) DF-49696
Media guide F lower

DE-12724
AFT_T cable assemblyDF-49682
Aluminium patch (F)

DG-40385
AFT_Tcable assembly
DF-49641
Media guide F right cover

DE-36783
Thermistor assembly
EA-47711
Cup screw M3x6

MS-0603006C
AFT_H cable assembly

DF-49637
Thermistor holder
DF-46468
AFT_H cable assemblyDF-49678

Thermistor assemblyDF-46639

MS-9703000A
Cup screw M3x6

MS-0603006C
Aluminium patch (Large)

DG-40244
Preheater (100)
DE-36792
After heater assembly (VJ1204) DF-49695

Aluminium patch (F)
DG-40385
Media guide Assy

2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement Platen Assy
Platen Assy
Exploded View
PLT_T1 cable assembly DF-49679

* Connect to the thermistor R

DF-49638
* Connect to the thermistor R.
PLT_T2 cable assembly DF-49680

* Connect to the thermistor L

DF-49639
* Connect to the thermistor L.
Antireflection sheet
DF-49644
Platen seal 1(VJ1304)

DE-37136
Platen 2
machining diagram
DE-36874
Platen stay R
DE-36779
Platen spacer R
DG-40141
Platen seal 2
DF-49589
Thermistor assembly
EA-47711
Binding head small screw M3x5 Ni-3

MS-1103005C
Thermistor holder
DF-46468
Cup Screw M3x4 Zn-CM2
MS-0603004A
Platen stay F
DE-36778
Nut plate
DF-49588

DF-49634

DG-40387
PLT_H2 cable assembly DF-49676
Round head screw

(Finishing), M3x6 Ni-3
MS-03030061

DF-49618
Platen seal 1(VJ1304)

DE-37136

DF-49634
PLT_H1 cable assembly DF-49675
Round head screw

(Finishing), M3x6 Ni-3
MS-03030061
Platen seal 2
DF-49589

MS-1103005C
Platen heater
DE-36791
DG-40387

MS-1103005C
Platen spacer F
DG-40140

DF-49618
Hexagon socket pan flat head M3x6 Ni-3

MS-35030061
Hexagon socket pan flat head M3x6 Ni-3

MS-35030061
Platen Assy
2007.12.20 Rev.B
Model NameVJ-1304
Supplement Cartridge Assy
Cartridge Assy
Exploded View
Cartridge holder
DG-40544
Holder Pressure springDF-43967
Holder Pressure spring
DF-42552
Holder guide I/C upper

DF-42113
P tight cup M3x6 Ni-3

MS-59030061
CARD board holder

DE-35048
Joint (BK)
DF-49992
Tapping screw M3x8

P tight cup
MS-5903008A

DF-48529
DF-43968
For K/C/M
Joint screw M6
DF-49778
For Y
Torsion spring 3490

DF-42116
Joint screw M6
DF-49778
Joint (BK)
DF-49992
O-ring M6 (butyl rubber)

DF-46476
O-ring M6 DF-46671

DF-46476
Cartridge pipe B
DF-48684
Joint screw M6
DE-49778
O-ring M6 DF-46671
Joint screw M6
DE-49778

DF-46476
Tapping screw M3x10 P tight cup
MS-59030101
O-ring M6 DF-46671
Tapping screw M3x14

S tight cup
MS-52030141
P tight cup M3x20

MS-59030201
Cartridge pipe A
DF-48683
DF-46476
O-ring M6 DF-46671
Tapping screw M3x8 P tight cup

MS-5903008A
M2x8 S tight binding
MS-51012008A
Urethane roll stock

DG-40404
I/C holder mounting plate

DE-12821
INK cable assembly (VJ12)

DF-49893
INK cable assembly
DG-40138
P tight cup M3x10 Ni-3

MS-59030081
Felt
DE-49772

DF-44766
IH cap
DE-36886

DF-46700
I/C holder I/C lower

DE-22265
Cartridge base (additionally machined)
DE-36986
P Tight pan M5x16 Zn-Cm2

MS-5705016A
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Cartridge Assy
2007.9.5 Rev.A
Model NameVJ-1304
10
Supplement Maintenance Assy
Maintenance Assy
Exploded View
Wiper origin RLY assembly

DF-49002
Cleaner head
DF-49487
Cap head
DF-49486
Cap head assembly
DG-41179
Wiper origin RLY assembly

DF-48636
Pump cap assembly
DF-48652

DF-49687
Cap spring
DG-40517
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Flushing box
DE-37231
Cap slider (additionally machined)

DE-37222
Tapping screw M3x6
S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Clamp 5SV0
DF-47184
hose band 14
DG-47223
Frame, cap
DE-12720
Absorber_aintenance
DG-40302
Mini-clamp (MN-2)
E-MN-2
Frame Assy
Waste fluid tray fixing plate
DG-40936
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Waste fluid guide lid

DE-36676
Pump motor RLY assembly

DF-48993
Maintenance assembly (VJ13)

DG-41149
Pump motor RLY assembly

DF-48624
Absorber D
DG-41180
Waste fluid guide 2

DE-36675
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Tapping screw M3x8

P tight cup
MS-5903008A
Folded
Clamp 5SV0
DF-47184
Maintenance base1
DE-36746
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558
Grommet (NG-79-L)
DG-40460
Flat clamp FCR35

E-FCR-35-V0
Leak proof plate

DG-40693
70
Waste fluid sensor relay cable sssembly (VJ13)

DG-41176
L type fitting
DG-41175
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Waste fluid cover

DE-37237
50
Silicon tube 8-11

DG-40903
90
Maintenance base 2
DE-22214
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Maintenance Assy
2007.12.20 Rev.C
Model NameVJ-1304
11
Supplement Cover Assy
Cover Assy
Exploded View

MS-5204008A

MS-0503005A
DE-36499
Top cover (A0)

DE-12554
Front cover receiver assembly DF-49056

Six assemblies required for total replacement.
Side cover
DE-13011
Front cover buffer
DF-49236
Tapping screw M4x12

tight binding Black
MS-5804012B
Hand rubber_VJ
DF-49718
Cover SW fixing material

DE-36549
F cover flag rubber

DF-49222
Scroller FG plate L
DG-40692
F cover flag
DF-49230
Scroller roller shaft L3
DG-40823
Slotted pin A type 310

DF-49231
Scroller receiver roller3

DG-40690
FFC cushion
DF-49502
Scroller receiver roller assembly (VJ13) DG-41135

(One piece is inside in each package.)
Roll receiver L_assembly (VJ13)

DG-41136
Scroller receiver roller3
DG-40690
Scroller receiver L
DE-22355
Tapping screw M3x6
S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Scroller receiver R
DE-22354
Cover L sensor assembly (A0)

DF-48642
Front cover buffer

DF-49236
Scroller roller shaft R3

DG-40822
Slotted pin A type 310

DF-49231
F cover flag rubber

DF-49222
Roll receiver R_assembly (VJ13)
DG-41137
Scroller FG plate R
DG-40691
Sensor cover L
DE-22128
Sensor cover L_assembly DF-49057
Front cover (A0)

DE-12556
I/H cover VJ
DE-12726
P tight binding
M410 Ni-3
MS-58040101
Pressure lever cap
DE-36552
F cover flag
DF-49230
Tapping screw M48

S tight cup
MS-5204008A
Tapping screw M4x12

tight binding Black
MS-5804012B
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A

MS-0503005A
Tapping screw M48

S tight cup
MS-5204008A
Cover L sensor A0_assembly DF-49013

Panel sheet
DF-49894
Tapping screw M3x6

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
VJ panel sheet
DG-40170
Panel unit
DE-22147
Sensor cover R
DE-22129
Sensor cover R_assemblyDF-49058
Cover R sensor assembly

DF-48640
Side cover R
DE-12552
Panel unit assembly

DF-48977
Cover R sensor assemblyDF-49011
Panel tape wire

DF-48616
Panel cable assembly
DF-49014

MS-5204008A
Panel stay
DE-22146
Cover Assy
2007.12.20 Rev.C
Model NameVJ-1304
12
Supplement Board Assy
Board Assy
Exploded View
Inlet fixing plate

DG-41036
Round head spring screw (finishing) M330

MS-05030301
* Cable images are omitted in this fugure.

For layout and maintenance numbers of cables,
refer to the electric wiring diagram.
AC inlet
DF-46652

DG-40248
AC inlet
DF-47293

DF-49022
Fan seal
DF-48699
Bush OLBT-26
DF-47187
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558 7
Round head spring screw (Small) M38

MS-0403008A
Round head spring screw (finishing) M4x6

MS-0504006A
Pan head small screw M4x6
MS-0104006A
Terminal block
E-RTK-10M-4P
Fuse
E-F7165-250V15A
Flat clamp FCR35
E-FCR-35-V0
Short bar
E-BB7.0-2
Fuse
DF-49683

DE-36583
Fuse holder
E-F-66BD
Round head spring screw (finishing) M310
MS-0503010A
Bush OLBT-13
DF-47186
Clamp RMS-1VO
DF-48558 7

DF-48975
Fuse holder
E-F-66AD
Cup screw M36
MS-0603006A

DF-49669
DF-49628
Clamp 2SV0
DF-47183

DE-37002
Cup screw M36

MS-0603006A
Clamp 2SV0
DF-47183
SODIMM 128MB Assy
DF-49715

DF-49661
Cup screw M36

MS-0603006A
MAIN board assembly

DE-36766
Round head spring screw (finishing) M3x20
MS-0503020A
Cooling fan _assembly
DF-49023
Power bracket
DE-22233
Clamp 2SV0
DF-47183
128MB SODIMM
DF-49495
HEATER CONT2 board assembly

DG-41105
Cup screw M36

MS-0603006A
Tapping screw M36

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
HEATER CONT2 board assembly

DE-37129
Fan bracket 3
DE-36621
MAIN board assembly
DF-49658
DF-48724
Tapping screw M36

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Clamp 2SV0
DF-47183
Controller board bracket
DE-22266
MAIN board bracket
DE-36889
Connector panel 2
DE-36620
Tapping screw M36

S tight cup
MS-5203006A
Board Assy
2007.12.20 Rev.B
Model Name : VJ-1304
13
Supplement Leg Assy / Accessory Assy
Leg Assy / Accessory Assy

Exploded View
Flange L
S-1104331
Adaptor
S-1104332
Scroller (VJ1304)
DE-37143
Leg AssyVJ1304
DE-13079
Stopper Shaft L
TB-40714
Operation Manual
(VJ-1304AJ_CD)
DE-37148
Operation Manual (CD VJ13 English/Japanese

DG-41151
E stopper ring E-3

MS-8003000A
Flange R
S-1104330
Waste fluid level switch (VJ16)
DG-40442
Screw set for Leg Assy

DF-49080
Waste fluid level switch

(VJ16)
DG-41091
Adaptor
S-1104332

DF-49080
Waste fluid bottle

DE-36248
Waste fluid bottle Assy
DF-47867
Quick Reference (VJ1304E)

DG-40702
Power cable 15Afor Japan)
DE-37146
Leg Assy(VJ13)
DG-41145
Power cable 10Afor Europe)

DE-37147
Power cable 15A (VJ13 Japan

DG-41146
Waste fluid bottle holder

DE-36248
Round head spring screw
M48
MS-0504008A
Power cable 10A (VJ13 for Europe

DG-41148
Free Caster Assy
DF-49071
Power cable 15Afor US)

DE-37145
Caster with a lock Assy

DF-49070
Power cable 15A (VJ13 for US)
DG-41147

DF-49080
Leg Assy, Accessory Assy

2007.12.22 Rev.B
Model Name: VJ-1304
14
Supplement Take Up Unit R
Take Up Unit R
Exploded View
Take Up cover
DE-22286
Binding head small screw

M3x5 Ni-3bk
MS-1103005C
Bearing F698ZZ
DG-40200
E-ring (JIS) E-6
MS-8006000A
Holder roller
DG-40203
Bearing F698ZZ
DG-40200
Pressure roller
DG-40210
Set collar
DG-40125
Pressure arm
DG-36967
Tension spring
Holder roller
BUY6-30
DG-40473
DG-40213
Spring anchor
Hexagon socket bolt
DG-40217
M4x8 Ni-8
MS-31040081
Metal washer
DG-40218
To Take Up unit L
Set collar
PSCSW8-10
DG-40216
Bearing 6001ZZNR
DG-40201
Flange bush
80F-0806
DG-40224
Chassis (outer)
DE-12092
Hexagon socket head
screw with spring washer
and flat washer
M4x10 Ni-3
MS-35040101
C-ring (shaft) JG12

MS-8212000A
Drive shaft C
DG-40197
Release shaft
DG-40206
Hexagon spacer BSB-328

DG-40225
Round head spring screw M3x6 Ni-3
MS-05030061

DG-40192
E-ring (JIS) E-8

MS-8008000A
E-ring (JIS) E-6

MS-8006000A Clamp2 SVO
DF-47183
Tension fulcrum shaft R

DG-40221
Lock screw (flat tip)
M4x4
DF-44703
Tension flag
DG-40244
W_OFF sensor assembly
Flange bush
DG-40286
80F-0806
DG-40244
W_ON sensor assembly
DG-40285
E-ring (JIS) E-6
VJ take-up unit motor assembly

DG-40471
Sprocket (small)
DG-40193
Pressure arm shaft

DG-40212
E-ring (JIS) E-6
MS-8006000A
Bearing F688ZZ
DG-40199
Support shaft
DE-36966
Flat washer (polished) M6
MS-8706000A
Shaft stay
DG-40196

M4x8 Ni-3
MS-05040081
E-type fixing ring E-5

MS-8005000A
Spring anchor
SASPO4-15
DG-40209
Tension spring
AJ mounting plate BUU10-35
DG-40214
RDS-36810
Take Up fixing bracket (VJ13)
DE-37266
Take Up CNT board assembly for VJ

DE-36988
VJ12ROOL motor
DE-36965
Locking screw (taperd tip)

M4x6 Ni-3
MS-21040061
DC cable assembly
DG-40483
VJ take-up CNT board assembly

DG-40478
Hexagon nut M4
MS-9404000A
Urethane washer
DG-40233
Stopper 2
DG-40220
Drive roller
DG-40472
SW mounting plate
DG-40227
Clamp 2SV0
DG-47183
Release block
DG-40207
Drive roller
DG-40198
DC cable assembly
DG-40283
Pan-head machin screw

M3x8 Ni-3
DG-01030081
Rubber leg TK-12

DG-40228
Stopper 1
DG-40219
Locking screw (tapered tip)

M4x6 Ni-3
MS-21040061
Take Up SW board assembly for VJ

DG-40274
M3x6 Ni-3
MS-05030061
AC cable assembly
AC cable assembly DG-40482
DE-36992
Power unit
(for Take Up in Oversea use)
DF-44506
Power unit assembly POP
E-ZWS30-24/J
Clamp2SV0
DG-47183
Power unit cover
DG-40226
Pressure roller shaft

DG-40211
Tension arm R
DG-36971
Board chassis
Flat head screw M3x6 Ni-3
DE-22285
MS-12030061
VJ take up SW board assembly

DG-40479
Pan-head screw
with spring washer
and flat washer (polished)
M4x10 Ni-3
MS-05040101
C-ring (shaft) JG-12

MS-8212000A
Release cam
DG-40205
Pure touch knob

DG-40204
Bearing 6001ZZNR
DG-40201
Chain CHE15-58
DG-40195
Pan-head screw with spring washer

and flat washer (polished)
M4x6 Ni-3
MS-05040061
Lever GRMS5
DG-40208
MS-8006000A
Take Up fixing plate R (VJ13)

DE-37267
Hexagon socket head

screw with spring washer
and flat washer
M4x10 Ni-3
MS-35040101
Photo interrupter
(KODENSHI CORP.)
E-SG2481
W_ON sensor cable assemlby

DG-40480
Chassis (inner R)
DE-12901
CR_HP sensor, Lever sensor Round head spring screw
M4x8 Ni-3
DF-49471
MS-05040081
Sensor holder
DF-44703
W_OFF sensor cable assembly
DG-40481
Parallel block 4-18

DG-40202
Sprocket (Large)
DG-40194
Take Up Unit R
2007.9.11 Rev.A
Model Name: VJ-1304
15
Supplement Take Up Unit L
Take Up Unit L
Exploded View
Hexagon Socket Pan Flat Head
M4x8 Ni-3
MS-3504081

M4x10 Ni-3
MS-35040101
Knurling NRSSR4-15
DG-40230
Scroller receiver L
DE-36970
Engineering plastic bearing Hexagon Socket Pan Flat Head
(polished), M4x10 Ni-3 Pivot axis
EBB30
MS-35040101
DG-40239
DF-46253

M4x10 Ni-3
MS-35040101
Set screw (cut point)

M4x6 Ni-3
MS-21040061
E stopper ring E-7

MS-8007000A
Tension roller (VJ-13)

DE-37270
Flange bush
80F-0806
DG-40224
Support roller L
DG-40474

(polished), M5x12 Ni-3
MS-35050121

M4x8 Ni-3
MS-35040081
Arm stopper
DG-40231
Cap 2 NX
DF-43213
MS-21040061
Flange bush 80F-0806
DG-40224
Take up base L (VJ13)

DE-37265
Set screw (cut point)

M4x6 Ni-3
MS-21040061
Flange bush
80F-0806
DG-40224
Tension fulcrum shaft L

DG-40222
Tensin arm L
DE-36972
Arm stopper
DG-40231
Flange L
S-1104331
Povot axis
DF-46253
Reinforcing piller (VJ13)
DG-41045
E stopper ring E-7
MS-8007000A
Tension arm R
DE-36971
Adaptor
S-1104332
Urethane cushion AXFH

DG-40232
Cap 32MMR
E-105-12401

MS-35040101
Take Up fixing plate LVJ13

DE-37268

MS-35050121
Set collar
PSCSW8-10
DG-40216
Stopper 1
DG-40219
Take up scroller (VJ13)

DE-37269

MS-35040081
Urethane washer
DG-40233
To Take Up unit R
Tension arm R
DG-36971
VJ take up scroller 13
T.B.D
Cap 32MMR
E-105-12401
Power supply cable 10A (for US)

DG-40484
Power cable 10A (for US)

DE-36755
E stopper ring E-3

MS-8003000A

M3x8 Ni-3
MS-05030081
Adaptor
S-1104332
Roll paper core (VJ13)

DG-41053
Flange R
S-1104330
Stopper shaft L
TB-40714
E stopper ring E-3
MS-8003000A
Drive collar
DG-40238
Drive collar
DG-40475
2007.9.11 Rev.A
Take Up Unit L
Model Name: VJ-1304
16

Manual de Mantenimiento VJ1304

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Mantenimiento VJ1304

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or

The product and the contents of this publication may be changed

MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

About this Manual

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

About this Manual

Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the printer

Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.

Explains the specifications of the printer.

Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the service parts

Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer.

Explains the maintenance mode of the printer.

Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.

Explains daily maintenance of the printer.

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

About this Manual

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

General Table of Contents

General Table of Contents

General Table of Contents

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

3.4 Options/Supplies List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Choosing a Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

4.4 Replacement of PF Driving Section Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 Replacement of CR Driving Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

General Table of Contents

4.6 Replacement of Head Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

General Table of Contents

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.6 Ink Charging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.8 Cleaning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

5.10 Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

General Table of Contents

5.12 Servo Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

General Table of Contents

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

Sub Controller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7.4 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 PF Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

General Table of Contents

General Table of Contents

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes.............................................................. 1- 2

Important Safety Instructions ................................................................ 1- 3

Warning Labels ....................................................................................... 1- 9

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

1.2 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or damage to

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of the

Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the printer

VJ-1304 Maintenance Manual

1.3 Important Safety Instructions